You are on page 1of 215

Athol J.

Carr
Carr Research Ltd,
41 Cashmere Road,
Christchurch 8022,
NEW ZEALAND.

Email. Athol.carr@canterbury.ac.nz
COMPUTER PROGRAM LIBRARY

Program name:– Program type:– Program code:–


RUAUM OKO3D Inelastic Dynamic Analysis ANSI Fortran

Author:– Date:–
Athol J Carr 2 June, 2017

RUAUMOKO

The Maori God of Volcanoes and Earthquakes

Volume 3: User manual for the 3-Dimensional Version, Ruaumoko3D

Copyright \ Athol J. Carr, Carr Research Ltd., 1981-2017. All Rights reserved.
Running the program RUAUM OKO3D.

The program is designed to run in an interactive m ode or in a batch m ode with an input data file that m ay be
prepared using a word-processor, a spreadsheet or a text editor. If a word-processor or spreadsheet is used
to prepare a data file then the data MUST be saved as a plain ASCII text file. In the default form the program
will prom pt the user for the input data. The input data supplied m ay be logged so that it can be used for later
analyses and prepared data files m ay be used for all or part of the input data. For further details on the use of
the com m and processor used in the program type $HELP at any prom pt. Com plete all responses by
pressing the RETURN/ENTER key.

To run the program call the program by the m ethod appropriate to your operating system . On a personal
com puter just type RUAUM OKO3D assum ing that the file RUAUM OKO3D.EXE and the associated .DLL and
.HLP files are in your current directory or path.

In Microsoft W indows operating system s another option is to create a shortcut on the desktop and for this
purpose a suitable icon for RUAUMOKO3D, Ruaumoko3D.ico, is supplied with the program .

The program prom pts for responses to a series of questions. Default responses, where appropriate, are
enclosed in square brackets, [ ]. File nam es m ust m atch the conventions of your operating system but file
nam es, with paths where necessary, m ust not exceed 60 characters in length and m ust not contain blanks.

The first question asks for the nam e of the output file. The default is the com puter console or term inal screen.

The next three questions are for nam es of the files containing the earthquake accelerogram s or the excitation
histories. The default value assum es that the excitations are appended to the rest of the input data. If there
are less than three inputs records just hit the RETURN key for the subsequent requests. If the file nam es
are included in the excitation part of the data file then just hit the RETURN key at each prom pt.

The next question asks for the nam e of the DYNAPLOT post-processor file. This file will only be opened if
requested by a greater than zero value of the variable KPA later in the data. This file is autom atically given
the extension .RES or .RAS if required, or if the nam e shown, which uses the filenam e of the output file, is
acceptable, just hit the RETURN key.

The next question asks for the selection of on-screen graphics. Any answer not of the form Y, YE or YES
(upper or lower case) will suppress the graphics. If the answer was YES and the screen supports colour
graphics you will later be asked if you want COLOUR graphics or not. Note; if on-screen graphics is enabled
the screen cursor is invisible at the end of all future prom pts.

The next question asks if this is a data check run only. If so type Y, YE or YES. In the case of the data
check run the analysis is term inated at the com pletion of the m odal analysis and just before the start of the
tim e-history analysis. The total storage requirem ents for the tim e-history analysis is checked.
The program then displays inform ation on logging or adding data files

The next prom pt is for the title nam e of your analysis which is the first line of the data described in the
following sections of this m anual. If the user already has a data file ready then type $ADD filename, where
filename is the nam e and path if necessary of the data file, followed by RETURN. If the user is going to key
the data in as prom pted, it is suggested that the all of the data be logged in a file for later use and to save re-
supplying this data in the event of a data error by giving the com m and $LOG filename, where filename is the
nam e of the file where data is to be logged, followed by RETURN. Note that all responses prior to this one will
not be logged even if logging had been enabled at an earlier prom pt.

At the com pletion of reading and checking of all of the input data for the analysis, the program , if it is running
in an interactive m ode and the on-screen graphics is enabled, the user will be prom pted as to whether colour
graphics is wanted.

The on-screen graphics draws a picture of the structure with all m em bers num bered and the analysis pauses
until the RETURN key is pressed. If you want a hard copy use the pull-down m enu at the top left of the
window to print the picture or to save it as a The program will next plot the accelerogram s or excitation
histories scaled to the m agnitudes used in the analysis. These are cleared by pressing the RETURN key.
After the m odal analysis is com plete the user is asked if the m ode shapes are to be displayed in an anim ated
display. Respond by typing the m ode num ber followed by RETURN. Five and a quarter cycles of vibration
are displayed unless a different num ber of cycles is specified. The default response END term inates the
plotting of m ode shapes and starts the tim e-history analysis.

2
During the tim e-history, on-screen pictures of the deform ed shape of the structure showing the locations of
inelastic behaviour are presented but require no user action because the pictures are replaced autom atically
as soon as a new picture is ready. Excessive use of the screen capture during the tim e-history m ay cause
the system to crash.

Running the program RUAUM OKO3D in Batch M ode.

The program RUAUMOKO3D m ay be run in a batch m ode as well as the interactive m ode described above.
In the batch m ode the graphics is disabled and the test data option is also disabled.

The .BAT file has the com m and line as follows:

RUAUM OKO3D outputfile inputfile quake1file quake2file quake3file

If the RUAUMOKO 3D executable file RUAUM OKO3D is not in your path then the path should be part of the
com m and.

The outputfile is the nam e (including the path) of the output file. This file m ust NOT exist. If the file does
exist the analysis will term inate im m ediately. The post-processor file, if requested in the input data, will have
the sam e file nam e (and path) but with the extension .RES or .RAS .

The inputfile is the nam e (including path) of the input data file (in the form required in the following part of
this m anual) and the file MUST exist. If the file cannot be found, because the nam e or path is incorrect then
the analysis will term inate.

The files quake1file, quake2file and quake3file are the nam es (including paths) of the excitation files.
These file nam es are optional, if they are m issing or the word INPUT (in upper case) is supplied instead than
they are assum ed to be part of the inputfile above. If files nam es are supplied then the files MUST exist or
the analysis will be term inated.

If there are less than two argum ents following the com m and RUAUM OKO3D then the program will run in the
norm al interactive m ode.

As m any such com m and lines as desired m ay be arranged in a .bat file, the best exam ple was a visitor to the
departm ent who set up 475 runs in a batch file and went away for days skiing. The only real lim itation is the
am ount of disk required for the output files, especially if the post-processing file is also output.

Enviroment Settings.

RUAUMOKO3D m akes great use of a local random access scratch file during th analysis. At each tim e-step
and in each iteration a read and a write operation is carried out for each m em ber in the structure.

On the latest personal com puter version RUAUMOKO3D the scratch file is em ulated in m em ory which has
increased the execution speed of the program by factors of up to 8.

3
OVERVIEW OF THE DATA FOR "RUAUM OKO3D"

The analysis data for the structure is described by the following sequence of input lines. Each data set
consists of the following item s of data.

1 Title for the Analysis - one line - see section 1

2 Analysis Control Param eters - one line - see section 2

3 Earthquake Transform ation - one line - see section 3

4 Structural Param eters - one line - see section 4

5 Output and Plotting Param eters - one line - see section 5

6 Plot Transform ation - one line - see section 6

7 Iteration and Travelling wave param eters - one line - see section 7

8 NODES - one line - see section 10


This is followed by one line for each nodal point giving the coordinates, the boundary condition flags,
displacem ent slaving flags and the output control flag. The nodes m ust be in ascending num erical
sequence. If lines are om itted their data will be interpolated.

9 DRIFT-one line - see section 7a


This is followed by a list of nodes, one per level starting at the base to be used to determ ine the inter-
storey drifts. If inter-storey drifts are requested the envelopes of inter-storey drifts are output in the
output file. If Residual displacem ents and forces are alos requested then the residual inter-storey drifts
are also output. If inter-storey drifts are requested and the excitation is an earthquake then the
envelopes of level total acceleration are also output

10 ELEMENTS - one line - see section 11


This is followed by one line for each m em ber in the structure giving the property-set num ber, the four
nodal point num bers that define the location, or connectivity, of the m em ber and the output control flag.
the m em bers m ust be in ascending num erical order. Lines m ay be om itted with interpolation giving the
properties of the intervening m em bers.

11 PROPS - one line - see sections 12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26 and 27.


This is followed by lines for each of the sections in the properties table together with data on strength
and stiffness degradation param eters covered in appendices A and B.

12. MLOADS - one line (O nly if required in Elem ent data set) - see section 33. This is followed by one line
for each of the m em ber load sets.

13 W EIGHTS - one line - see section 30. Except for static analyses this section M ust be provided.
This is followed by one line for each node that has a specified point, or lum ped, weight for the m ass
m atrix. If there are no nodal weights then supply lines for the first and last nodes with just the nodal
point num bers on each of the lines.

14 LOADS - one line - see section 34


This is followed by one line for each node that has a static load applied to it.

15 SHAPE - one line - see section 35 - ONLY required if IPVERT# -1, i.e. there is one or m ore dynam ic
load histories applied in the analysis or if IPANAL = 6 for the Adaptive Push-O ver analysis or if IPANAL
= 7 for the Cyclic Adaptive Push-Over analysis.
This section only applies to dynam ic load histories and not to earthquake analyses.

This is followed by one line for each node that has a contribution to the dynam ic forcing function that will
act on the structure. The m agnitudes of the loads are m ultiplied by the dynam ic loading history which is
described in the following section.

This section 15 above MUST be repeated for each of the -IPVERT dynam ic load cases.

4
16 STATIC - one line (Only for Multi-load case static analyses). see section 34
This is followed by one line for each node that has a static load applied to it.

This section 16 above MUST be repeated for each of the IPVERT static load cases.
The section 14 Loads above are treated as load case 0

17 EQUAKE - one line - see section 36 or 37 - This is only required if there are one or m ore com ponents of
the accelerogram or loading history. These are only used in a Tim e-Histoty analysis and thet are is not
used in a Static analysis or in an Adaptive Push-Over analyses.
This is followed by a line with the param eters for the accelerogram or the loading history.
This then m ay be followed by the accelerogram , displacem ent history or loading history though in m ost
cases the accelerogram , displacem ent history or loading history is read from a separate file.

This section 16 above MUST be repeated for each of the earthquake or loading histories.

18 SPECTRA - one line - see section 38. This is only required if the analysis is for a Response Spectral
Analysis.
This is followed by a line with the param eters for the Acceleration Response Spectra.
This then m ay be followed by the data for the response spectra though the spectra could be read from a
separate file.

Note: In the following user guide, each line of required data is indicated by a box containing the data item s.
Below each box is a description of the data item s. The data item s on each line m ay be separated by a
com m a or blank spaces. The form at for the item s are indicated by the letter at the end of each descriptive
line with A indicating a character string, I indicating an integer value and F indicating a floating point num ber.
A floating point num ber m ay or m ay not have a decim al point and m ay also take a scientific or exponent form
such as 1.5E6 which could also be expressed as 1500000.0. Character strings will be upper-cased unless
enclosed in double or single quotes and will term inate at the first blank space unless the string is enclosed in
quotes. Floating point num bers m ay also be input as expressions (please asee TinyClip m anual for rules on
expressions).

W arning about number range in data sets.

In all of the program s in the Ruaum oko Suite the data is read and interpreted with the TinyClip Com m and
Processor. (See Ruaum oko Theory m anual). W hen the data line is read by the TinyClip Com m and Processor
the line is parsed into a string of item s which m ay be Integer num bers, Real (Floating Point) num bers or
Character strings. These item s are separated by blank spaces, com m as or equal signs. The Integer num bers
do not have a decim al point whereas the Real num bers have a decim al point or the power of 10 exponent E
followed by an integer num ber. The integer and real num bers m ay be signed with the + or - sign or be
unsigned. If the group of characters on the line do not fit the rules for an Integer num ber or a Real num ber it
is treated as a Character string which has the num erical value of 0. An exception is the expression which
m ust have the correct arrangem ent of parentheses (see the TinyClip m anual) and are evaluated as a real
num ber or an integer num ber depending on the num erical form s found inside the expression.

If the data is produced by som e other program the user needs to be aware of the lim itations of num ber size on
a digital com puter. TinyClip assum es that the input data satisfies the lim itations of a 32 bit num ber, this is
particularly true for the Integer num bers which m ust have a num erical m agnitude less than or equal to 2 31-1
i.e. 2147483647. An Integer larger than this will be unable to be interpreted by the operating system and will
term inate the analysis. Real, or Floating Point, num bers for input are lim ited to approxim ately 7 significant
decim al digits which is m ore than adequate for any input data. If you are generating data in another program
for Ruaum oko etc. which is expecting floating point data then save it as floating point data and not in integer
form . Integer data should be saved in integer form .

5
Damping models.

It is strongly recom m ended that the traditional Rayleigh Dam ping m odels are NOT used in your analyses.
These Rayleigh dam ping m odels have been used since the m id-1950s and problem s with its use were
recognized in 1978 with the first versions of Ruaum oko having the alternative Modal dam ping m odels
available but at that tim e the com putational penalties associated with Modal dam ping not so popular. W ith the
speed of the present com puters these com putational penalties do not justify the excessive dam ping shown by
the Rayleigh dam ping m odels.

Rayleigh dam ping has been recognized for a long tim e (since 1980) as having a very detrim ental effect on
non-linear tim e history analyses with excessive dam ping actions appearing in the results. As m uch as the
m ethod has been the traditional dam ping approach the m ethod has NO physical or m athem atical justification.

It is strongly recom m ended that you use the Modal (W ilson-Penzien) dam ping as provided by the variable
ICTYPE being 2, 3 or 4. Most users will use ICTYPE = 2 specifying the sam e level of dam ping at two different
m odes which im plies uniform dam ping across all m odes. W ith ICTYPE = 3 it will be possible to have two
different levels of dam ping across the m odes and an even greater variation would be possible with ICTYPE =
4.

In the latest version of the program there is a new elem ent based m odal dam ping m odel ICTYPE=9 (at
present only for Frame and Spring elem ents) which enables different levels of dam ping to be prescribed in
different parts of the structure. This m odel also has the ability to update the dam ping properties as the
elem ents stiffness changes. This elem ent dam ping m odel has the further advantage that the com putational
penalties associated with ICTYPE equal 2, 3 or 4 no longer apply as im plicitly the dam ping m atrix has the
sam e form as does the stiffness m atrix, However, in Ruaum oko, with this m odel the structure dam ping m atrix
is not used as the dam ping actions can be directly com puted from the elem ent dam ping properties..

6
THE DATA FILE FOR "RUAUM OKO3D"

The analysis data for the structure is described by the following sequence of input lines or card im ages. Note
that a blank line is ignored by the program except after the word START in the accelerogram s displacem ent
histories or load histories.

1. Description of the analysis

Description of the structure (up to 79 alphanum eric characters)

7
2. Principal analysis options

IPANAL IPLAS IPCONM ICTYPE IPVERT INLGEO IPNF IZERO ORTHO IM ODE

IPANAL = 0 ; Static Analysis (with iteration for in-elastic behaviour) I


= 1; Static (with iteration for in-elastic behaviour) and Eigen Frequency Analyses
= 2; Dynam ic Tim e-history using Newm ark constant average acceleration
= 3; Dynam ic Tim e-history using Central Difference explicit m ethod
= 4; As for IPANAL=2 above but see note below.
= 5; As for IPANAL=3 above but see note below.
= 6; Adaptive Push-Over
= 7; Cyclic Adaptive Push-Over
= 8; Multiple Input Ground Displacem ent Histories.
= 9; As for IPANAL=8 above but see note below.
=10 ; Response Spectrum Analysis
=11; Multiple Load Case Static analysis
IPLAS = 0; Elastic Tim e-history Analysis only I
= 1; In-elastic Tim e-history Analysis
IPCONM = 0 ; Lum ped m ass m atrix used in Tim e-history I
= 1; Diagonal m ass m atrix used in Tim e-history
= 2; Consistent m ass m atrix used in Tim e-history
ICTYPE = 0 ; Initial Stiffness Rayleigh Dam ping I
= 1; Tangent Stiffness Rayleigh Dam ping
= 2; Linear variation of dam ping with elastic natural frequencies
= 3; Tri-linear variation of dam ping with elastic natural frequencies
= 4; User Specified m odal dam ping
= 5; Material Specific Rayleigh Dam ping
= 6; Rayleigh Dam ping with Tangent stiffness m atrix used for Secant dam ping m atrix
= 7; Material Rayleigh with Tangent stiffness m atrix used for Secant dam ping m atrix
= 8; Elem ental Hysteretic Dam ping (Not operational yet)
= 9; Elem ental W ilson-Penzien Modal Dam ping
= 10; Elem ental Convolution Dam ping
IPVERT = 0 ; X-direction earthquake com ponent only I
= N; N com ponents of earthquake excitation (1 # N # 3)
= -N ; N com ponents of dynam ic loading history (1 # N # 99)
= N; N com ponents of dynam ic displacem ent history (1 # N # 99) (IPANAL = 8 or 9)
= N; N static loads applied (1 # N # 99) (IPANAL = 11)
INLGEO = 0 ; Sm all displacem ent analysis assum ed. (norm al case) I
= 1; Large displacem ent effects included
= 2; P-Delta effects included (after the static analysis the stiffnesses
are m odified for axial forces and then INLGEO is reset to 0)
IPNF = 0 ; Modal analysis is carried out after the static analysis (norm al case) I
= 1 ; Natural frequencies and Mode Shapes are NOT calculated
= 2 ; Modal analysis is carried out before the static analysis
IZERO = 0 ; All zero output is om itted (norm al case) I
= 1 ; All zero output is printed
ORTHO = 0 ; Mode shape orthogonality check not carried out I
= 1 ; Mode shape orthogonality check printed
IM ODE = 0 ; Householder QR eigenvalue algorithm used (Default) I
= 1 ; Jacobi eigenvalue algorithm used
= 2 ; Sub-space iteration eigenvalue algorithm used

8
Notes: If IPANAL is greater than 0, a static analysis is carried out if any static loads are specified and then
the m odal analysis is perform ed unless suppressed, or the order of the operations is reversed, by
the variable IPNF.

Lim its on valid ranges for variable IPVERT


If IPANAL = 1,2,3,4, or 5, IPVERT = 0,1,2 or 3, or >-100
If IPANAL = 6 or 7, IPVERT = -1
If IPANAL = 8 or 9, IPVERT < 100
If IPANAL = 11, IPVERT < 100

For IPANAL = 4 or 5. Degrees of Freedom flagged as for travelling wave input are treated as fixed
for the static and m odal analyses and are then released at the start of the relative displacem ent tim e
history integration.

For IPANAL = 9. Degrees of Freedom flagged as input nodal displacem ent degrees of freedom are
fixed for the static and m odal analyses and are then released at the start of the total displacem ent
tim e history integration.

IPANAL = 6 is for an Adaptive Push-Over Analysis where the input load pattern is adapted as the
structure deform s and the analysis will term inate when the lim it displacem ent is reached, the
factored elastic displacem ent is reached or the structure stiffness reduces to 0.1% of the initial
stiffness.

IPANAL = 7 is for a Cyclic Adaptive Push-Over Analysis where the input load pattern is adapted as
the structure deform s and when the change points in the prescribed displacem ent history is reached
the loading again reverts to the initial loading pattern but in the opposite direction and the adaptive
loading again continues until the next reversal point in the displacem ent history is reach. The
analysis will term inate when the displacem ent history is com pleted or the structure stiffness reduces
to 0.1% of the initial stiffness.

IPANAL = 8 is for the case for sim ulating a laboratory excitation where a displacem ent is applied to
the structure at a particular degree of freedom or a set of degrees of freedom . In this case the
degrees of freedom where the displacem ents are to be applied are treated as free for the static and
m odal analyses, i.e. gravity and free-vibration cases and then the displacem ent histories are applied
to these degrees of freedom . The analysis is a Relative Displacem ent form ulation.

IPANAL = 9 is for the case for the analysis of a structure where the ground is to be subjected to a
set of specified ground displacem ent histories. This would be appropriate if the different m otions
are to be applied at different parts of the foundation or at different depths in the foundation. For the
static and m odal analyses these degrees of freedom need to be fixed to prevent rigid body
displacem ents of the structure. The analysis is a Total Displacem ent form ulation.

IPANAL = 10 is for the case for the analysis of a structure where the ground m otion is based on an
acceleration response spectra. The data for a norm al dynam ic analysis is read but then the analysis
is reset to linear elastic, the dam ping m odel is reset to Rayleigh dam ping, the m ass m atrix is reset
to diagonal and the analysis is set to sm all displacem ent theory. There m ay be separate spectra for
the each earthquake direction or the sam e spectra m ay be use for all earthquake com ponent. The
analysis is a Relative Displacem ent form ulation.

IPANAL = 11 is for the case for the analysis of a structure where there are m ore than one static load
case. The section under loads which is norm ally used in dynam ic analyses to apply the gravity
loads prior to applying the seism ic excitation is treated as load case 0 and m ay be com bined with
the subsequent static loads which m ay be used to apply lateral load com binations for Code type
static load analyses.

IM ODE is used to select the eigenvalue algorithm used to com pute the natural frequencies and
m ode shapes of free-vibration. The default is the Householder and QR algorithm that has been
used since the m id-1960s. This has always been reliable but in 2001 3 instances were reported
where non-orthogonal m odes were com puted The Jacobi algorithm is the m ost stable algorithm
available but is slow, and if any m ode shapes are required they all have to be found, recom m ended
for sm all problem s only. The Sub-space iteration m ethod is suitable for very large problem s but
m ust be used with care if parts of the structure have very sm all m asses with sm all stiffnesses to

9
m atch as the iteration process m ay then be unpredictable. The iteration uses a generalised Jacobi
eigenvalue routine.

ICTYPE = 0 m eans that the dam ping m atrix is based on a Rayleigh dam ping m odel and uses the
stiffness of the structure at the beginning of the tim e-history. The com puted dam ping m atrix is
constant throughout the tim e-history analysis. The tangent, secant and elastic dam ping m atrices
are identical. This m eans that as the structure softens, by yielding etc., the effective dam ping
increases because the Rayleigh coefficients á and â were com puted for the initial natural
frequencies of free-vibration and som e of the frequencies have now decreased. It m ust be noted
that the Rayleigh dam ping m odel shows that the level of dam ping in the higher m odes of free-
vibration can be very large.

ICTYPE = 1 m eans that the dam ping m atrix is based on a Rayleigh dam ping m odel and uses
current stiffness of the structure at any tim e step as the tangent dam ping m atrix. If the structure is
inelastic then the tangent dam ping m atrix changes together with the stiffness m atrix throughout the
tim e history. The dam ping forces in the structure are adjusted in the tim e step with the increm ent of
the dam ping forces being the product of the tangent dam ping m atrix m ultiplied by the increm ental
velocities in the structure. The increm ental dam ping forces are then added to the dam ping forces
existing in the structure at the beginning of the tim e step to give the dam ping forces at the end of the
tim e-step.

ICTYPE = 2 m eans that the dam ping m atrix is based on the W ilson-Penzien dam ping m odel and is
based on the frequencies and m odes of free-vibration at the beginning of the tim e-history analysis.
The levels of dam ping associated with each m ode varies linearly with frequency. The com puted
dam ping m atrix is constant throughout the tim e-history analysis. The tangent, secant and elastic
dam ping m atrices are identical. This m eans that as the structure softens, by yielding etc., the
effective dam ping will increase. However, as the dam ping in the higher m odes of free-vibration is
m uch less than that im plied in the Rayleigh dam ping m odel this does not appear to have significant
consequences. This is the most strongly recommended system damping model.

ICTYPE = 3 is a variation of the W ilson-Penzien dam ping m odel where the levels of dam ping
associated with each m ode varies in a tri-linear m anner with frequency. This m odel was initially used
to com pare the results with the Rayleigh dam ping m odel where the dam ping in the highest m odes
was set to be the sam e as those found in the Rayleigh dam ping m odel. It can also be used to set
high, low (or zero) levels of dam ping in the high m odes of free-vibration. This is an alternative to
ICTYPE = 2 w ith extra selection flexibility.

ICTYPE = 4 is a variation of the W ilson-Penzien dam ping m odel where there is a little m ore control
of the dam ping levels set for the different m odes of free-vibration. This is an alternative to ICTYPE
= 2 w ith extra selection flexibility.

ICTYPE = 5 is a variant of the Rayleigh dam ping m odel where the Rayleigh coefficients á and â are
specified separately for every m em ber in the structural system . This enables different dam ping
levels to be specified in different parts of the structural system , i.e. a pounding study with buildings
of different types exhibiting different levels of dam ping or for a building on a soil foundation which
probably exhibits different dam ping to that shown by the building. The Rayleigh coefficients á and â
need to be com puted separately for each structural system and then specified in the section
properties for each m em ber type. If only initial stiffness dam ping â is used then the analysis is
sim ilar to ICTYPE = 0 above and if tangent stiffness dam ping â is specified than the effect id sim ilar
to ICTYPE = 1 above. If there are nodal m asses input as well as m em ber m ass then the
contribution of these nodal m asses to the dam ping m atrix can be achieved by specifying M ODE1 =
M O DE2 = 0 and by supplying C1 as á in the Fram e data line below. The dam ping m atrix com puted
is the tangent dam ping m atrix.

ICTYPE = 6 is a variation of the Rayleigh dam ping m odel where the the tangent stiffness m atrices
are used to form the secant dam ping m atrix. In this case the dam ping forces at a tim e-step are the
product of the secant dam ping m atrix tim es the current velocities of the structure. For the dynam ic
increm ental stiffness m atrix the tangent dam ping m atrix is assum ed to be the sam e as the secant
dam ping m atrix and the forces are then adjusted to m atch those from the secant dam ping m atrix.
This m odel m atches what som e users believe is the Rayleigh m odel with tangent stiffness dam ping
where others believe that ICTYPE = 1 fits that m odel. There is a potential problem with this
dam ping m odel for structures containing non-linear dash-pot m em bers.

10
ICTYPE = 7 is the equivalent of ICTYPE = 6 for structures using the ICTYPE = 5 m em ber specific
Rayleigh dam ping m odel and this m odel assum es that the dam ping m atrix is the secant dam ping
m atrix.

ICTYPE = 8 is where the dam ping m odel is an elem ent based Hysteretic (Non-viscous) m echanism
to give the dam ping phenom enon. In this m odel the decay m echanism is a function of the
displacem ents and not velocities. The extra decay forces are treated as equivalent dam ping actions
for post-processing purposes. This dam ping m odel m eans that the decay properties are updated as
the m em ber stiffness changes.
(This model is still under development and is not to be used yet).

ICTYPE = 9 is where the dam ping is m odelled by a m odal m ethod (sim ilar to ICTYPE=2) but at an
elem ent level. In this m odal the dam ping m atrix for the structure is not necessary saving
considerable m em ory and also the large eigenvalue analysis required of the structure is no longer
needed to form the structure dam ping m atrix. Each elem ent in the structure can have different
am ounts of viscous dam ping so as to represent the behaviour of those elem ents. Options allow the
dam ping properties to be updated as the elem ent stiffness changes
(Not available for all element types yet).
This should, in future, be the recommended viscous damping model as it allow s for different
damping levels in different parts of the structure and enables the dam ping properties to
reflect the changes in stiffness in the structure..

ICTYPE = 10 uses one of a variety of Convolution Integrals to represent the decay of m otion in the
structure. This is a non-viscous dam ping m odel, though with the form ulation the integrals do use
the velocity to com pute the so-called dam ping actions.This is, as in ICTYPE =8 and ICTYPE=9, a
elem ent by elem ent form ulation so that every elem ent can be ascribed different decay properties
and use different functions within the integrals to represent possible hysteretic dam ping, friction
dam ping or other dam ping-like m echanism s.
(Still under developments and not available for all element types yet)

11
Rayleigh or Proportional Dam ping Model ICTYPE=0 or 1

Linear or Tri-Linear Dam ping Model ICTYPE=2 or 3

User Specified Modal Dam ping ICTYPE=4

12
3. Earthquake Excitation Component Transformation

(Only supply if IPVERT above is greater then 0 and IPANAL above is 2, 3, 4 or 5)

X1 Y1 Z1 X2 Y2 Z2 X3 Y3 Z3

These num bers represent the transform ation giving the global X, Y and Z com ponents for the I excitation
histories where I = IPVERT is 1, 2 or 3.

The transform ation has the form

Note: The transform ation does not have to be orthogonal or represent unit vectors, i.e. the user m ay
scale each of the excitations in different ways. There m ust be at least a non-zero com ponent in
one of the directions for each of the I excitations.

If the transform ation required is an Identity transform ation, i.e. the first, second and third
earthquake com ponents are in the X, Y and Z directions respectively, respond with the word
DEFAULT or the letter D (in upper or lower case).

Exam ples.

The First earthquake com ponent is at 30E to the X axis, the Second com ponent is at 90E to the First
com ponent and the Third com ponent is in the Y direction.

Then

13
4. Frame Control Parameters

NNP NM EM NTYPE NM ODE M ODE1 M ODE2 GRAV C1 C2 DT TIM E FACTOR

NNP Num ber of nodal points in the structure I


NM EM Num ber of m em bers in the structure I
NTYPE Num ber of different cross-sections in the section table I
NM ODE Num ber of m ode-shapes required to be printed in the m odal analysis I
M ODE1 The m ode num ber at which the first dam ping ratio is applied. I
M ODE2 The m ode num ber at which the second dam ping ratio is applied. I
GRAV The acceleration of gravity F
C1 The percentage of critical dam ping at m ode M ODE1 F
C2 The percentage of critical dam ping at m ode M ODE2 F
DT The integration tim e-step (Tim e units, usually seconds) F
TIM E The length of tim e-history to be run (Tim e units, usually seconds) F
FACTOR A scale factor applied to the tim e-history input (Default = 1.0) F

Note: If both M ODE1 and M ODE2 above are zero then the coefficients C1 and C2 are to be taken as the
constants á and â of the Rayleigh dam ping m odel.
If there is only one dynam ic degree of freedom then if M ODE1=1 and M ODE2=0 then m ass
proportional dam ping is m odelled.
If there is only one dynam ic degree of freedom then if M ODE1=0 and M ODE2=1 then stiffness
proportional dam ping is m odelled.
If ICTYPE=4 then M ODE1 is the num ber of m odes for which dam ping ratios are to be specified and
M ODE2 should be set to zero.
If ICTYPE=2 and C1=C2 then the dam ping ratio is constant = C1 for all m odes of free vibration.

5. Output Intervals and Plotting Control Parameters

KPRNT KPOST KPLOT DFACT XM AX YM AX ZM AX IFM T NLEVEL NUP IRESID KDUM P

KPRNT = 0; Tim e-history output suppressed I


= k; Tim e-history output every k tim e-steps
KPOST = 0; Post-processor DYNAPLOT output suppressed I
= k; Post-processor DYNAPLOT output every k tim e-steps
KPLOT = 0; Plastic Hinge plotting suppressed I
= k; Plastic Hinge plotting at every k tim e steps
DFACT Displacem ent m ultiplying scale factor for on-screen graphics. (DFACT $ 1.0) F
XM AX Maxim um X displacem ent for use in the on-screen graphics F
YM AX Maxim um Y displacem ent for use in the on-screen graphics F
ZM AX Maxim um Z displacem ent for use in the on-screen graphics F
IFM T = 0; Binary DYNAPLOT file with filenam e extension .RES I
= 1; ASCII DYNAPLOT file with filenam e extension .RAS
NLEVEL Num ber of levels for com puted inter-storey drifts, i.e. num ber of storeys+1 I
If NLEVEL is less than 2 then inter-storey drifts are not output.
NUP Vertical axis for inter-storey drifts, 1=X axis, 2=Y axis or 3=Z axis I
IRESID = 1; Residual displacem ents and forces output at end of tim e-history output. I
= 0; No residual output
KDUM P = 0; Mass and Stiffness m atrix output suppressed I
= k; Mass m atrix output and Stiffness m atrix output every k tim e-steps

Note: If the displacem ents of the structure exceed the lim itations XM AX, YM AX or ZM AX then the picture
is clipped.
If KPRNT is zero for a response spectra analysis (IPANAL=10) then only the com bined m odal
response will be output whereas if KPRNT is greater than zero each m odal response will also be
output.

14
6. Plot Axes Transformation

Txx Txy Txz Tyx Tyy Tyz

These num bers represent the transform ation giving the X plot and Y plot projection com ponents of the global X, Y
and Z coordinates for the graphical presentation of the structure and its displacem ents.

The transform ation has the form

Note: The transform ation does not have to be orthogonal or represent unit vectors, i.e. the user m ay distort
the structure in different ways. There m ust be at least a non-zero com ponent of the structure in each
of the X plot and Y plot axes and the two rows of the m atrix m ust not be the sam e.

The default tranform ation assum es an isom etric projection with the X axis to the right, the Y axis
vertical and the Z axis to the left. In this case respond with the word DEFAULT or the letter D (in
upper or lower case).

Exam ple. The Default transform ation.

Then

15
7. Iteration Control and W ave Velocities

M AXIT M AXCIT FTEST W AVEX W AVEY W AVEZ DXM AX DYM AX DZM AX D OM EGA F

M AXIT If IPANAL not = 3. The m axim um num ber of cycles of Newton-Raphson I


iterations per Tim e-step. If =0 : no iteration
If IPANAL = 3. (explicit integration) M AXIT is the num ber of sub-steps per
tim e-step DT in the integration of the equations of m otion i.e. the actual
integration tim e-step used is DT/M AXIT
M AXCIT Maxim um num ber of cycles of iteration/solution step for dam ping m odels I
ICTYPE $ 2 that have coefficients outside the skyline of the stiffness m atrix.
FTEST Norm of the out-of-balance force vector relative to the increm ental force F
vector for both Newton-Raphson iteration and the dam ping iteration
W AVEX Ground wave velocity of propagation in the global X-direction. F
W AVEY Ground wave velocity of propagation in the global Y-direction. F
W AVEZ Ground wave velocity of propagation in the global Z-direction. F
DXM AX X displacem ent to term inate analysis, 0.0 im plies infinite lim it. F
DYM AX Y displacem ent to term inate analysis, 0.0 im plies infinite lim it. F
DZM AX Z displacem ent to term inate analysis, 0.0 im plies infinite lim it. F
D Travelling W ave Dispersion factor F
0.0 im plies no dispersion (D = infinity)
1.0 Maxim um dispersion
100.0 Minim um dispersion
OM EGA Earthquake Characteristic Frequency (Radians/second) used for dispersion F
F Scale factor for dispersion (default = 0.10) F

Notes: 1. If IPVERT is negative then travelling wave m odels are not perm itted.
2. If the ground wave velocities W AVEX, W AVEY and/or W AVEZ are input as zero they are
treated as infinite.
3. W hen the Central Difference m arching m ethod is being used for the tim e-history integration
then the actual tim e-step DT/M AXIT m ust be less than half the shortest natural period of the
structure if num erical instability is to be avoided in the tim e-history integration.
4. The Displacem ent lim its are absolute values in that only positive num bers are used.
5. The default value for FTEST used when either one or both of M AXIT and/or M AXCIT are
specified is 0.00001. Note that the squares of the vector norm s are used in the test so that
0.001 im plies a 3% tolerance and 0.0001 im plies a 1% tolerance.
6. If the variable M AXCIT is applicable the m axim um num ber should lie in the range of 1 to 3. As
a rule, experience has shown that very seldom is m ore than one cycle of iteration required.
7. As a general observation not m ore than about 5 Newton Raphson iterations should be needed
in any tim e-step
8. If Dispersion is applied to the travelling wave, then the am ount of dispersion applied to the
accelerogram applied to nodes after the first node to receive the input depends on the wave
velocity, the distance between the nodes (i.e. the tim e delay) and the dispersion param eter D
and the characteristic earthquake frequency O M EGA. The dispersion is in the form of a white
noise which is designed not to significantly alter the response spectra of the input ground
m otion. The first node to receive the input m otion has no dispersion applied to its input
m otion. The dispersion is a strictly random process which m eans that the input at the nodes is
never able to be repeated m eaning that subsequent analyses with the sam e data are not
repeateable. If D is supplied as a negative num ber then a pseudo-random process is used
m eaning that a re-run with the sam e data will produce the sam e results. This m ay be useful
for param eter studies where one does not want the effects of the param eter variation to be
clouded by the strictly random nature of the default (D positive) dispersion.
9. The dispersion am plitude m ay be scaled by the factor F.

16
8. User Specified M odal Damping Parameters (Only if ICTYPE = 4)

M ODE1 DAM P1 M ODE2 DAM P2 .. .. M ODEn DAM Pn

M ODEi Mode num ber. Must be in ascending num erical order, I


DAM Pi Percentage of Critical Dam ping for M ODEi F

Notes:
1. Num ber of Modes n specified m ust equal M ODE1 of line 2, Principal analysis options.
2. Dam ping for m odes less than the first m ode above is taken as DAM P1 and dam ping for m odes
greater than M ODEn is taken as DAM Pn. This m odel m ay be considered as a variation of the
trilinear dam ping m odel.
3. For m odes with num bers in-between the m odes specified, the Percentage of Critical dam ping is
interpolated with respect to the m odal frequencies of the m odes at the beginning and end of the gap
in the m ode num bers.

9. Time-history Output Control

Output control during the tim e-history integration is under the control of the param eters KPRNT and KPOST
on the Section 4 above.

1. If the param eter KPRNT is non-zero, = I, the results are written to the output file, or device, every I
tim e steps starting at step 0.

2. If the param eter KPOST is non-zero, = J, then results go to the post-processing DYNAPLOT file
every J tim e steps starting at step zero.

The control of which nodes or m em bers have their results output is determ ined by the param eter IO UT
associated with each of the nodes or m em bers in the following data sections.

The value of IOUT lies in the range of 0 to 3;

IOUT = 0; if required, the results will be sent to both the output file and written to the DYNAPLOT file.
= 1; if required, will only be written to the DYNAPLOT file
= 2; if required, will only be sent to the output file.
= 3; will neither be printed in the output file or written to the DYNAPLOT file.

Default values of IOUT are set on the lines with the words NODES or M EM BERS in Sections 10 or 11 below
and these values will apply for all nodes or m em bers unless over-ridden by new values on the data for that
node or m em ber. Interpolated nodes or m em bers take the value for the first node or m em ber in the sequence.

At every Jth tim e step, starting at tim e=0.0, the following inform ation will be written to the DYNAPLOT post-
processing file.

1. The tim e, ground accelerations and the inertia, dam ping and elastic energies, the external work
done by the applied loads and the plastic work.

2. For every requested node, the node displacem ents, velocities, accelerations, dam ping forces, inertia
forces and applied loads are output.

3. For every requested m em ber, the m em ber forces, the m em ber deform ations, the m em ber action
stiffness flags as a percentage of the elastic stiffness. (For beam m em bers: axial, flexure about zz
axis at ends 1 and 2, torsion, flexure about yy at ends 1 and 2) or (For spring m em bers:
displacem ents in all three local axis directions, rotations about all three local axes, forces in all local
axis directions and all three m om ents). All this nodal and m em ber data can be plotted by the post-
processor program DYNAPLOT.

17
10. Nodal Point Input

One input line with the word NODES starting in colum n 1.

NODES IOUT IPLANE

IOUT Output control flag (see section 9 above) I


IPLANE = 1 or X; Structure only m oves in the Y-Z plane I
= 2 or Y; Structure only m oves in the Z-X plane
= 3 or Z; Structure only m oves in the X-Y plane

If IPLANE is non-zero, or not blank, then the nodal boundary conditions set in the following data lines are
autom atically reset to constrain the structures m ovem ent. This m eans that the structure m ay be restrained to
m ove in a plane without having to change all the nodal data. If m ore that one earthquake excitation has been
specified for IPVERT in line 2 then these excitations m ust be still input even if they have no effect on the
structure.

One input line required per nodal point, except that the presence of sequential nodal points with equally
spaced nodal point coordinates need only be im plied by the presence of the first and last nodal points of the
sequence. Boundary conditions and coupling will be taken (except for the last nodal point in the sequence) as
being identical to those of first nodal point in the sequence.

N X Y Z N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 KUP1 IOUT KUP2

N Nodal point num ber I


X X-coordinate of node N F
Y Y-coordinate of node N F
Z Z-coordinate of node N F
N1 X-displacem ent boundary code I
N2 Y-displacem ent boundary code I
N3 Z-displacem ent boundary code I
N4 X-rotation boundary code I
N5 Y-rotation boundary code I
N6 Z-rotation boundary code I
KUP1 Master Node num ber. Prim ary Slaving I
IOUT Output control flag (see section 9 above) I
KUP2 Master Node num ber. Secondary Slaving I

Notes: The nodal points m ust be arranged in ascending num erical sequence and the first and last nodal
points must have their data supplied.

There is no restriction of the ordering of m aster and slave nodes in the program and daisy chaining
of slaving (slaving a node to a node that is already slaved to another node) is allowed although not
recom m ended. The unconstrained degrees of freedom are num bered and the program then
com putes the appropriate equation num bers for the slaved nodes. However, care MUST be
exercised to ensure that circular chaining, slaving a node back to itself, does not occur.

Once the m em ber data has been input the equations are autom atically renum bered to m inim ise the
execution speed and m em ory requirem ents in the subsequent equation solving. This m eans that if
the user later wishes to apply foundation com pliance to what was a fixed-base structure then the
original node num bering does not have to be changed, the new num bers for the new foundation
nodes to take the com pliance m em bers are just appended to the existing node sequence. Sim ilarly,
adjoining fram es in a pounding study can be num bered sequentially rather than being num bered
across floors of both structures to m inim ize band-width.

18
Dum m y nodes (nodes not connected to any m em ber in the structure) m ay be left in the data set as
long as all degrees of freedom of that node are fully fixed. The program will actually check and fix
any nodes that are not connected to the ends of fram e-like m em bers or to the corners of
quadrilateral elem ents. Master nodes do not have to have m em bers connecting them to the slaved
nodes.

Boundary codes:
Ni = 0 m eans the displacem ent or rotation is unconstrained.
Ni = 1 m eans the displacem ent or rotation is zero.

If a node is not connected to any m em ber (such as the inner nodes of the five node
m em bers or the fifth node of such m em bers) so that there is no stiffness associated
with the node then the program will autom atically fix the degrees of freedom of the
node and a warning m essage will be printed in the output file.

Ni = 2 m eans that the displacem ent of this degree of freedom is slaved (the sam e as) that
degree of freedom of the Master node KUP1.

If the node is not in the sam e location as the m aster node then rotational coupling in
one axis direction im plies that the displacem ents of the other two axes are rigidly
coupled in the appropriate rigid plane to the m aster node. This m ay be used to m odel
floor diaphragm s that m ay be considered as rigid in their own planes but as the other
degrees of freedom m ay be left unconstrained or uncoupled so that the plane is
considered to be flexible for deform ations out of the plane.

If N4 = 2 then N2 and N3 m ust also equal 2.


If N5 = 2 then N3 and N1 m ust also equal 2.
If N6 = 2 then N1 and N2 m ust also equal 2.

For nodes that not in the sam e location the program will check for the translational
coupling associated with the rotational degree of freedom couplings and will
autom atically adjust the boundary conditions.

Ni = 3 m eans that the displacem ent of this degree of freedom is slaved (the sam e as) that
degree of freedom of the Master node KUP2.

If the node is not in the sam e location as the m aster node then rotational coupling in
one axis direction im plies that the displacem ents of the other two axes are rigidly
coupled in the appropriate rigid plane to the m aster node. This m ay be used to m odel
floor diaphragm s that m ay be considered as rigid in their own planes but as the other
degrees of freedom m ay be left unconstrained or uncoupled so that the plane is
considered to be flexible for deform ations out of the plane.

If N4 = 3 then N2 and N3 m ust also equal 3.


If N5 = 3 then N3 and N1 m ust also equal 3.
If N6 = 3 then N1 and N2 m ust also equal 3.

For nodes that not in the sam e location the program will check for the translational
coupling associated with the rotational degree of freedom couplings and will
autom atically adjust the boundary conditions. If the degree of freedom has already
been slaved to m aster node KUP1 then that slaving takes precedence.

Ni = -1 If IPANAL is 2 or 3 in line 2 above then this indicates that this is an input degree of
freedom for travelling wave input for the i com ponent of the input where i = 1, 2 or 3
im plies the x, y or z earthquake input com ponents respectively. This option is not
available for the rotational degrees of freedom as there is no option to consider
rotational earthquake excitations.
If IPANAL is 4 or 5 in line 2 above, then this degree of freedom is fixed for the static
and m odal analyses but is released for a norm al relative-m otion tim e-history
response.

Ni = -k If IPANAL is 8 or 9 in line 2 above, Multiple Input Displacem ent Histories, this degree
of freedom has the displacem ent specified in the Input Displacem ent com ponent k.

19
Ni = 2 m eans that the displacem ent of this degree of freedom is slaved (the sam e as) that
degree of freedom of the Master node KUP1.

If the node is not in the sam e location as the m aster node then rotational coupling in
one axis direction im plies that the displacem ents of the other two axes are rigidly
coupled in the appropriate rigid plane to the m aster node. This m ay be used to m odel
floor diaphragm s that m ay be considered as rigid in their own planes but as the other
degrees of freedom m ay be left unconstrained or uncoupled so that the plane is
considered to be flexible for deform ations out of the plane.

If N4 = 2 then N2 and N3 m ust also equal 2.


If N5 = 2 then N3 and N1 m ust also equal 2.
If N6 = 2 then N1 and N2 m ust also equal 2.

For nodes that not in the sam e location the program will check for the translational
coupling associated with the rotational degree of freedom couplings and will
autom atically adjust the boundary conditions

Master Node:
KUP1 = 0 m eans no coupling of the degrees of freedom .
KUP1 = J m eans that the degrees of freedom with Ni = 2 for this node are coupled to those
sam e degrees of freedom of Node J.
KUP2 = 0 m eans no coupling of the degrees of freedom .
KUP2 = K m eans that the degrees of freedom with Ni = 3 for this node are coupled to those
sam e degrees of freedom of Node K.

KUP2 This is norm ally used where the m ajor slaving is for a rigid floor diaphragm slaving, i.e. slaving the
horizontal displacem ents and rotation abput the vertical axis to node J.. The other degrees of freedom m ay be
then slaved to a second m aster node K. This param eter is only read as input if an Ni for the node has the
value of 3. Sim ilar rules to those noted above hold where a rotation degree of freedom is slaved to node K
except that the slaving to the node KUP1 takes precedence.

20
10a. Inter-storey Drift Input. (Only if NLEVEL on data line 5 is greater than 2)

One input line with the word DRIFT starting in colum n 1.

DRIFT ANGLE

The default inter-storey drifts are the differences in the displacem ents over the storey concerned.
If the word DRIFT is followed by the word ANG LE (m inim um of the letter A) then the inter-storey drifts are the
differences in the displacem ents divided by the inter-storey height. This m eans that the inter-storey drifts are
the drift angles (radians). If the word ANGLE or the letter A is om itted then the inter-storey drifts are the
default differences in the displacem ents over the storey.

This is followed by a line or lines with a list of a list of NLEVEL nodal point num bers starting with a node point
at the ground level and then with a node point at each storey progressing upwards from the bottom of the
structure. If the nodes cannot be listed on one line then take as m any lines as is necessary. The program will
continue reading data lines until all NLEVEL num bers have been read.

N1 N2 N3 . . . Ntop

N1 Nodal point num ber at ground floor, or first level, of the structure. I
N2 Nodal point num ber at the second level of the structure. I
N3 Nodal point num ber at the third level of the structure. I
... Nodal point num bers at interm ediate levels I
Ntop Nodal point at the top level of the structure I

Notes: If rigid floor diaphragm s are part of the m odelling then the nodal points at each level should be the
m aster node at that level. If this is not done then there will be difficulties in interpreting the results
because of the floor rotations about the vertical axis.

The total num ber of nodes must be NLEVEL where NLEVEL (see section 5 on page 12) is the
num ber of storeys+1.

If inter-storey drifts are requested the envelopes of inter-storey drifts are listed in the output file.

If Residual displacem ents and forces are also requested then the Residual inter-storey drifts are also
listed in the output file.

If inter-storey drifts are requested and the excitation is an earthquake (IPVERT $ 0) then the
envelopes of the Total Accelerations are also listed in the output file.

21
11. M ember Topology or Geometry

One input line with the word ELEM ENTS starting in colum n 1.

ELEM ENTS IOUT DISTL

IOUT Output control flag (see section 9 above) I


DISTL = 0; Mem ber loads are read as part of the m em ber properties sets. I
= 1; Mem ber load set data is read seperately and over-writes the values in
The Mem ber Properties tables.

Five Node Linear M embers

Quadrilateral or Panel M embers


Triangles Similar

22
One input line is required per m em ber in ascending order, except that sequential m em bers with a nodal point
num bering that uniform ly increm ents m ay be im plied by the provision of the first and last m em ber in the
sequence. The m em ber type for all interpolated m em bers will be taken as that for the first m em ber in the
sequence.

N M TYPE I J K L M IOUT LTYPE

N Mem ber num ber. I


M TYPE Mem ber property num ber, refers to the m em ber properties that follow later. I
I Nodal point num ber to which End 1 of the m em ber is connected to the I
structure.
J Nodal point num ber to which End 2 of the m em ber is connected to the I
structure.
K Inner nodal point at End 1 of the m em ber or Node 3 of quadrilateral I
(if K is zero or blank it is reset to equal I ) Must be non-zero for triangles
L Inner nodal point at end 2 of the m em ber or Node 4 of quadrilateral I
Input as zero for triangles (if L is zero or blank it is reset to equal J )
M Node to define local z axis of the m em ber. I
(For other than Quadrilateral, Panel, Lattice, Triangle or W all elem ents use
+X or -X if the local z axis is parallel to the positive or negative global X axis,
the + is optional and the X m ay be in upper or lower case.
If parallel to the global Y or Z axes replace the X with Y or Z respectively)
M ust be zero for Quadrilateral, Panel, Lattice,Triangular and W all elem ents.
IOUT Output control flag (see section 9 above) I
LTYPE Mem ber Load case num ber, refers to the m em ber load sets that follow later. I
Only read if DISTL has been set above (see line 11)

Notes: The 5-node fram e m em bers are connected to the structure at nodes I and J only. There are no
stiffness contributions to nodes K and L. These latter two nodes K and L are purely for a geom etric
definition in that they are assum ed to be connected to nodes I and J respectively by rigid links with
the flexible section of the m em ber lying between the inner nodes K and L.
The boundary conditions for the inner nodes K and L m ust be fully fixed. The program does a check
of all nodal point data and will fix these nodes if their degrees of freedom are not defined by som e
other m em ber.
In a large displacem ent analysis the coordinates of nodes K and L are updated from the increm ental
displacem ents and rotations of nodes I and J.

For other than the quadrilateral elem ents the local x axis is defined as being along the m em ber from
K to L with the origin at K. The local y axis is perpendicular to the plane defined by nodes K, L and
M . The local z axis is perpendicular to the local x and y axes and pointing to the sam e side of the
local x axis as is node M . These local axes form a right-handed cartesian coordinate system . Note
that the nodes K, L and M m ust not be co-linear.

For the Spring, Dam per, Tendon and Contact m em bers, if the length of the m em ber (the distance
between nodes K and L) is zero then the local axes are parallel to the global axes. The length of the
m em ber m ust be greater than zero for the Fram e and Ground m em bers.

For the quadrilateral and sim ilar finite elem ents all four nodal points are required and m ust be distinct.
The nodes I, J, K and L m ust proceed around the elem ent in an anti-clockwise order. Node M has no
m eaning for the quadrilateral m em bers and MUST equal 0. The local x axis lies along side I to J with
the origin at node I. The local y axis lies in the plane of the elem ent and is on the sam e side of the
local x axis as is node L. The local z axis is perpendicular to the local x and y axes and form s a
right-handed cartesian set of axes.

For Triangular elem ents nodes K and L shall be the sam e and M m ust be zero

23
For the trianglar finite elem ents all three nodal points are required and m ust be distinct. The nodes I,
J, K m ust proceed around the elem ent in an anti-clockwise order. Node M has no m eaning for the
triagular m em bers and MUST equal 0. The local x axis lies along side I to J with the origin at node I.
The local y axis lies in the plane of the elem ent and is on the sam e side of the local x axis as is node
K. The local z axis is perpendicular to the local x and y axes and form s a right-handed cartesian set
of axes. Node L will be reset by the program to be the sam e as Node J but this is of no
consequence.

Node M (where required) m ay be a node attached to another m em ber in the structure or it m ay be a


dum m y node, i.e. not connected to any m em ber in the structure. In the case that M is a dum m y
node, its boundary conditions m ust be fully fixed. Note that the direction of the local z axis is
determ ined by the position of M relative to the axis K - L and that if the axis sense is reversed the
signs of the m em ber m om ents etc. will be reversed.

Node M for the five node m em bers m ay also take the values of x, y or z (upper or lower case) which
im plies that the local z axis is parallel to and in the sam e direction as the global (or structure) X, Y or
Z axes respectively. If the values are -x, -y or -z then the axes are parallel to the corresponding
global axes but in the opposite direction.

24
12. Lateral Off-sets for Linear Elements.

Most one-dim ensional elem ents in the program have the ability to have their elem ent axis off-set from the line
through nodal points K and L. The off-sets are m easured from the elem ent axis to the line through nodes K
and L. The lateral off-set is the sam e at both ends of the elem ent as the direction cosines of the elem ent are
taken as identical to the direction cosines of the lines through nodes K and L. The variables in the elem ent
data sets, see following sections, are Y0 and Z0 as shown in the figure below.

Lateral Off-sets for Linear members

25
13. M ember Property Tables

One input line with the word PROPS starting in colum n 1.

PROPS ROTATION

ROTATION = Rotation; Frame and Beam m em bers output end rotations instead of end curvatures.
The program still does all com putation using curvatures but output is rotation.
Other elem ents use rotation autom atically. This would norm ally be output for
those carrying out the ASCE-41 (06) Perform ance Based Design checks as
ASCE-41 uses rotations as the m em ber of deform ation. The rotations are
obtained by m ultiplying the curvatures by the appropriate plastic hinge lengths.
(Minim um is letter R or r).
The post-processor file to DYNAPLOT for Fram e and Beam m em bers is then
also in the form of rotations.
= blank etc, then Frame and Beam m em ber deform ation output is in term s of curvatures

14. Section Property Information

One set of input for every different cross-section type (this m ay be due to the different initial load conditions
etc.). These m ust be arranged in ascending section num ber order and each m ust be one of the following
section types;

N M TYPE LABEL

N Section Num ber I


M TYPE = FRAM E => Beam or Beam -Colum n m em ber A
= BEAM => Beam or Beam -Colum n m em ber
= SPRING => Spring m em ber
= DAM PER => Viscous Dam ping m em ber
= TENDON => Active Tendon or Constant Force m em ber
= CONTACT => Contact or Im pact m em ber
= QUADRILATERAL => Quadrilateral Finite Elem ent
= PANEL => Masonry Panel Elem ent
= GROUND => Foundation Elem ent
= M ULTISPRING => Multi-Spring Elem ents
= COM POUND => Com pound-Spring Elem ents
= EXTERNAL => External Elem ents
= LATTICE => Lattice Elem ents
= REINFORCED => Reinforced concrete hinge Elem ent
= INERTIA => Relative Mass Elem ent
= TRIANGLE => Triangular Finite Elem ents
= M ACROELEM ENT => Macro_elem ent Non-Linrear Foundation Elem ent.
= SLOTTED => Slotted Concrete Hinge Elem ent
= W ALL => Quadrilateral Reinforced Concrete W all Elem ents
LABEL Maxim um 30 character label for section. If you wish to retain case or if the A
label contains blank characters enclose the label in single or double quotes.

The above line for each section shall be followed by the rem aining data for the appropriate m em ber types. See
the following sections. Note that M TYPE m ust contain, in m ost cases, the first letter of the m em ber type i.e.
the user m ay use FRAM E, FRAM , FRA, FR or F. However, sufficient letters m ust be used so that the selection
is unique. If the word is m is-spelt it will not be recognized and will lead to an error m essage and term ination of
the analysis.

26
SECTION 15 = FRAM E or BEAM type m em bers
SECTION 16 = SPRING type m em bers
SECTION 17 = DAM PING type m em bers
SECTION 18 = TENDON type m em bers
SECTION 19 = CONTACT type m em bers
SECTION 20 = QUADRILATERAL finite elem ents
SECTION 21 = PANEL elem ents
SECTION 22 = GROUND elem ents
SECTION 23 = M ULTI-SPRING elem ents
SECTION 24 = COM POUND-SPRING elem ents
SECTION 25 = EXTERNAL elem ents
SECTION 26 = LATTICE elem ents
SECTION 27 = REINFORCED concrete hinge elem ent
SECTION 28 = INERTIA (relative m ass) elem ents
SECTION 29 = TRIANGULAR finite elem ents
SECTION 30 = M ACRO-ELEM ENT foundation elem ents
SECTION 31 = SLOTTED Hinge elem ent
SECTION 32 = W ALL elem ents (reinforced concrete quadrilateral wall elem ents)

27
15 FRAM E and BEAM m em bers

Frame and Beam M embers

Note: The current version of Ruaumoko3D uses the BEAM m em ber. The FRAM E m em ber is retained for
backwards com patibility and both m em bers use the sam e source code and subroutines.

The only difference is that in the BEAM m em ber the user has the free choice of inelastic m em ber
m odel, variable ITYPE, and the yield interaction diagram s, variable IBEAM .

The FRAM E m em ber is treated as a subset of the BEAM m em ber. The FRAM E m em ber variable
ITYPE im plies a fixed selection of the m em ber m odel ITYPE and the yield interaction IBEAM in that
all the beam -colum n m em bers use the Giberson one-com ponent m em ber m odel.

28
15. FRAM E and FRAM E type member properties

Order of all of the com ponents required for Fram e Mem bers are:
1 Basic Section Properties, FRAM E m em bers see section 14a, BEAM m em bers see section 14aa
2 Section Elastic properties, see section 14b
3 Section End properties, see section 14c
4 Mem ber bi-linear factors and hinge lengths, only if IHYST > 0, see sections 14d and 14e
5 Section Dam ping Param eters, only if ICTYPE = 5,7,8,9 or 10 in line 2 of data set. See section 14f
6 Mem ber initial conditions, i.e. fixed-end forces, only if ICOND > 0, see sections 14g and 14h.
7 Yield Forces and Mom ents, only if IHYST > 0,
For BEAM m em bers see sections 14i
For Reinforced Concrete BEAM-COLUMN m em bers see sections 14j
For Flanged Steel BEAM-COLUMN m em bers see sections 14k
For Quadratic BEAM-COLUMN m em bers see sections 14l
For Reinforced Concrete BEAM-COLUMN m em bers see sections 14m
For Flanged Cruciform BEAM-COLUMN m em bers see sections 14n
8 In-elastic shear or shear link data, only if IGA > 0, see sections 14o or 14p
9 Strength Degradation Param eters, only if ILOS > 0, see section 14q
10 Stiffness Degradation Param eters, only if IHYST > 0, see section 14r
11 Dam age Index data, only if IDAM G > 0, see section 14s.

29
15a. Basic section control parameters (FRAM E m em bers only) (this line MUST be supplied)

ITYPE IPINZ IPINY ICOND IHYST ILOS IDAM G IGA IDUCT

ITYPE = 1; One Com ponent (Giberson) BEAM m em ber I


= 2; Reinforced Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (type 1) m em ber
= 3; Flanged Steel BEAM -COLUM N m em ber
= 4; General quadratic BEAM -COLUM N m em ber
= 5; Two-com ponent BEAM m em ber
= 6; Variable Flexibility BEAM m em ber
= 7; Reinforced Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (type 2) m em ber
= 8; Reinforced Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (type 3) m em ber
= 9; Reinforced Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (type 4) m em ber
=10; Flanged Cruciform Steel BEAM -COLUM N m em ber
IPINZ = 0; Mem ber built-in to joint (Norm al case) (about z-z axis) I
= 1; End 1 pinned (internally) to the joint
= 2; End 2 pinned (internally) to the joint
= 3: Both ends pinned internally to the joints
IPINY = 0; Mem ber built-in to joint (Norm al case) (about y-y axis) I
= 1; End 1 pinned (internally) to the joint
= 2; End 2 pinned (internally) to the joint
= 3: Both ends pinned internally to the joints
ICOND = 0; No initial loads applied I
= 1; Initial Fixed-End Forces or Prestress are applied. See section 14g
= 2: Initial Distributed Loads or Prestress are applied. See section 14h
IHYST = n; Hysteresis rule. See Appendix B I
ILOS = 0; No strength degradation. See Appendix A I
= 1; Strength reduction in each direction based on its ductility factor
= 2; Strength reduction based on num ber of cycles
= 3; Strength reduction based on m axim um ductility
= 4; Strength reduction as for ILOS=1 above but strength reduction also with
num ber of inelastic cycles.
= 5; Strength reduction as for ILOS=4 above but strength reduces suddenly
at ultim ate ductility.
= 6; Strength reduction as for ILOS=3 above but strength reduction also with
num ber of inelastic cycles.
= 7; Strength reduction as for ILOS=6 above but strength reduces suddenly
at ultim ate ductility.
= 8. ASCE-41-06 Perform ance Based Design perform ance checks carried out.
= 9. ASCE-41-13 Perform ance Based Design perform ance checks carried out.
IDAM G = 0; No dam age indices com puted I
= m; Dam age indices com puted. (Integer values only accepted m > 0 )
IGA = 0; Standard Beam or Beam -Colum n m em ber. I
= 1; In-elastic Shear in the y direction (flexure about z-z axis)
= 2; In-elastic Shear in the z direction (flexure about y-y axis)
= 3; In-elastic Shear in both the y and z directions
= 4; In-elastic Shear-Link Splice slip in the y direction (flexure z-z axis)
= 5; In-elastic Shear-Link Splice slip in the z direction (flexure y-y axis)
= 6; In-elastic Shear-Link Splice slip in both the y and z directions
IDUCT = 0; Flexural Stiffness rem ains constant as yield m om ent varies I
= 1; Flexural Stiffness varies so that yield curvature rem ains constant

Notes: 1. If ITYPE above is 6 then check IHYST against table of allowable hysteresis types. IPINZ and
IPINY m ust be 0 and the bi-linear factors RF in section 14d m ust have a value greater than
or equal to 0.01.
2. If the m em ber is linearly elastic then there is no effective distinction between m em bers with
different values of ITYPE
3. The only difference between the reinforced concrete Beam -Colum n m em bers, ITYPE 1 or 7
is the shape of the yield interaction diagram s.

30
4 The value of IDAM G is used as a weight when com puting the weighted dam age index for the
whole structure. Only integer values are accepted. If all dam age index flags are 1 then the
weighted dam age index for the structure is the average dam age index.

Giberson One-Component M ember

Tw o-Component M ember

Variable Flexibility M ember

31
15aa. Basic section control parameters (BEAM m em bers only) (this line MUST be supplied)

ITYPE IBEAM IPINZ IPINY ICOND IHYST ILOS IDAM G IGA IDUCT

ITYPE = 1; One Com ponent (Giberson) m em ber I


= 2; Two-com ponent m em ber
= 3; Variable (Quadratic EI in hinge) Flexibility m em ber
= 4; (not available yet)
= 5; Variable (Constant EI in hinge) Flexibility m em ber
= 6; (not available yet)
IBEAM = 1; Beam interaction (No axial force interaction) I
= 2; Beam -Colum n Interaction (Reinforced Concrete type 1)
= 3; Beam -Colum n Interaction (Flanged Steel - Chen)
= 4; Beam -Colum n Interaction (General quadratic)
= 5; Beam -Colum n Interaction (Reinforced Concrete type 2)
= 6; Beam -Colum n Interaction (Reinforced Concrete type 3)
= 7; Beam -Colum n Interaction (Reinforced Concrete type 4)
= 8; Beam -Colum n Interaction (Flanged Cruciform Steel)
IPINZ = 0; Mem ber built-in to joint (Norm al case) (about z-z axis) I
= 1; End 1 pinned (internally) to the joint
= 2; End 2 pinned (internally) to the joint
= 3: Both ends pinned internally to the joints
IPINY = 0; Mem ber built-in to joint (Norm al case) (about y-y axis) I
= 1; End 1 pinned (internally) to the joint
= 2; End 2 pinned (internally) to the joint
= 3: Both ends pinned internally to the joints
ICOND = 0; No initial loads applied I
= 1; Initial Fixed-End Forces or Prestress are applied. See section 14g
= 2: Initial Distributed Loads or Prestress are applied. See section 14h
IHYST = n; Hysteresis rule. See Appendix B I
ILOS = 0; No strength degradation. See Appendix A I
= 1; Strength reduction in each direction based on its ductility factor
= 2; Strength reduction based on num ber of cycles
= 3; Strength reduction based on m axim um ductility
= 4; Strength reduction as for ILOS=1 above but strength reduction also with
num ber of inelastic cycles.
= 5; Strength reduction as for ILOS=4 above but strength reduces suddenly
at ultim ate ductility.
= 6; Strength reduction as for ILOS=3 above but strength reduction also with
num ber of inelastic cycles.
= 7; Strength reduction as for ILOS=6 above but strength reduces suddenly
at ultim ate ductility.
= 8; ASCE 41-06 Perform ance Based Design perform ance checks carried out.
= 9; ASCE 41-13 Perform ance Based Design perform ance checks carried out.
IDAM G = 0; No dam age indices com puted I
= m; Dam age indices com puted. (Integer values only accepted m > 0 )
IGA = 0; Standard Beam or Beam -Colum n m em ber. I
= 1; In-elastic Shear in the y direction (flexure about z-z axis)
= 2; In-elastic Shear in the z direction (flexure about y-y axis)
= 3; In-elastic Shear in both the y and z directions
= 4; In-elastic Shear-Link Splice slip in the y direction (flexure z-z axis)
= 5; In-elastic Shear-Link Splice slip in the z direction (flexure y-y axis)
= 6; In-elastic Shear-Link Splice slip in both the y and z directions
IDUCT = 0; Flexural Stiffness rem ains constant as yield m om ent varies I
= 1; Flexural Stiffness varies so that yield curvature rem ains constant

Notes: 1. If ITYPE above is 3,4 or 5 then check IHYST against table of allowable hysteresis types. IPINZ
and IPINY m ust be 0 and the bi-linear factors RF in section 14d m ust have a value greater than
or equal to 0.01.

32
2. If the m em ber is linearly elastic then there is no effective distinction between m em bers with
different values of ITYPE or IBEAM
3. The only difference between variations in IBEAM is the shape of the yield interaction diagram s.
4 The value of IDAM G is used as a weight when com puting the weighted dam age index for the
whole structure. Only integer values are accepted. If all dam age index flags are 1 then the
weighted dam age index for the structure is the average dam age index.

Giberson One- Component


M ember

Tw o-Component M ember

Variable Flexibility M ember

33
15b. Elastic section properties (this line M UST be supplied)

E G A Jxx Izz Iyy Asz Asy Sy Sz W GT

E Elastic (Young's) Modulus of m em ber m aterial F


G Shear Modulus of m em ber m aterial F
A Cross-sectional AREA of the m em ber section F
Jxx Torsional 2nd Mom ent of Area of section in the x-x direction F
Izz Mom ent of Inertia (2nd Mom ent of Area) of section in the z-z direction F
Iyy Mom ent of Inertia (2nd Mom ent of Area) of section in the y-y direction F
Asz Effective SHEAR AREA of the m em ber section in the z direction F
(if Asz = 0.0 then shear deform ations in the section are suppressed)
Asy Effective SHEAR AREA of the m em ber section in the y direction F
(if Asy = 0.0 then shear deform ations in the section are suppressed)
Sy Distance of the Shear-Centre of the section from the x-z plane F
Sz Distance of the Shear-Centre of the section from the x-y plane F
W GT W eight/(unit length) of the m em ber F

Note: The weight/unit length is used to com pute the m em ber m ass and does not contribute to the static loads
on the m em ber or the structure.
The shear area Asz acts with Izz to carry the shear force acting in the local y direction.
The shear area Asy acts with Iyy to carry the shear force acting in the local z direction.

15c. Section End properties (this line M UST be supplied)

END1z END2z END1y END2y FJ1z FJ2z FJ1y FJ2y Y0 Z0

END1z Length of Rigid End-block at End 1 of m em ber for bending about z-z axis F
END2z Length of Rigid End-block at End 2 of m em ber for bending about z-z axis F
END1y Length of Rigid End-block at End 1 of m em ber for bending about y-y axis F
END2y Length of Rigid End-block at End 2 of m em ber for bending about y-y axis F
FJ1z Joint flexibility at End 1 (radians/unit m om ent) about z-z axis F
FJ2z Joint flexibility at End 2 (radians/unit m om ent) about z-z axis F
FJ1y Joint flexibility at End 1 (radians/unit m om ent) about y-y axis F
FJ2y Joint flexibility at End 2 (radians/unit m om ent) about y-y axis F
Y0 Lateral Off-set in the local y direction F
Z0 Lateral Off-set in the local z direction F

Notes: 1. If all values are zero supply a line with at least one 0.0 on it.
2. The end-block lengths END1 and END2 are within the beam between nodes K and L. There
m ust be som e length of m em ber rem aining after the End-block lengths are subtracted from the
distance between nodes K and L.
3. The joint flexibilities are m eant to represent a linearly elastic flexible connection to the nodes at
the ends of the m em ber. These are outside the possible Giberson plastic hinges in the sense
of the rotational springs being in series with the inelastic m em ber, i.e.

Giberson One-com ponent m em ber.

K - end block - joint spring - plastic hinge - elastic m em ber - plastic hinge - joint spring - end block - L

Two-Com ponent m em ber

K - end block - joint spring - elastic m em ber - joint spring - end block - L
- plastic m em ber -

34
15d. M ember Bi-linear Factors (only if IHYST above not equal 0)

RA RT RFz RFy

RA Bi-linear factor (or Ram berg-Osgood r) (Axial) F


RT Bi-linear factor (or Ram berg-Osgood r) (Torsion) F
RFz Bi-linear factor (or Ram berg-Osgood r) (Flexure about z-z axis) F
RFy Bi-linear factor (or Ram berg-Osgood r) (Flexure about y-y axis) F

Note: For all Beam -Colum ns the axial bi-linear factor is not used as the m em bers rem ain elastic in the axial
com ponent. For Beam -Colum ns the axial yield forces are used to com pute the yield m om ents in the
Axial force - Mom ent interaction diagram .

15e. M ember Hinge Lengths (only if IHYST above not equal 0)

H1 H2 H3 H4

H1 Plastic Hinge Length at End 1 about z-z axis F


H2 Plastic Hinge Length at End 2 about z-z axis F
H3 Plastic Hinge Length at End 1 about y-y axis F
H4 Plastic Hinge Length at End 2 about y-y axis F

Notes:
1. For One-Com ponent and Four-Hinge Beam s and all Beam -Colum ns the plastic hinge lengths are reset
to 1.0 if 0.0 is specified m aking the plastic curvature the sam e as the plastic hinge rotation.
2. The plastic hinge lengths are not used for the Two-Com ponent Beam m em bers.
3. The plastic hinge lengths for Variable Flexibility Beam s should be between 0.1 and 0.5 of the m em ber's
clear span.

15f. M aterial Specific Damping Parameters. (only if ICTYPE on line 2 equals 5 or 7).
Contributions of m em ber m atrices to Rayleigh Dam ping Matrix.

This option allows different sections to have their own values of ALPHA and BETA for Rayleigh Dam ping. This
is useful if one is m odelling a pounding study between two adjoining buildings where the buildings have different
dam ping characteristics or where different parts of the system have different dam ping characteristics, ie.e. in soil-
structure interaction studies. Dam ping m atrix C is given by

where M = Mass, = Initial Elastic Stiffness, = Current Tangent Stiffness.

BETA0 BETAT ALPHA

BETA0 Contribution of Initial Elastic Stiffness Matrix to Dam ping Matrix, F


BETAT Contribution of Tangent Stiffness Matrix to Dam ping Matrix, F
ALPHA Contribution of Mem ber Mass Matrix to Dam ping Matrix, F

35
15ff. Hysteretic Damping Parameters. (only if ICTYPE on line 2 equals 8). (still under developm ent)

ALPHA IOP BETA

ALPHA Multiplier on Elastic Force , F


IOP = 0; Quadratic reduction approaching reversal I
= 1; Linear slope on reversal
BETA IOP = 0; Fraction of crossing velocity where reduction starts F
(0.0 < BETA <1.0) BETA =1.0 im plies Step at reversal (Default = 0.5)
IOP = 1; Multiplier of Stiffness on reversal (BETA> 1.0) (Default = 4.0)

15fff. Elemental W ilson-Penzien (M odal) Damping Parameters. (only if ICTYPE on line 2 equals 9).

LAM BDA W EIGHT RADIUS IOP

LAM BDA % Viscous dam ping, F


W EIGHT W eight/unit length. F
If W EIGHT=0.0 then W GT on section properties is used. If both = 0.0 NO dam ping.
RADIUS Radius of Gyration of m ass about longitudinal axis. F
If RADIUS=0.0 then radius obtained from SQRT(Jxx/A) or SQRT((Izz+Iyy)/A)
IOP = 0; Dam ping coefficients rem ain constant with tim e. I
= 1; Dam ping coefficients updated as stiffness changes using a secant dam ping m odel.
= 2; Dam ping coefficients updated as stiffness changes using a tangent dam ping m odel.

15ffff. Convolution Damping Parameters. (only if ICTYPE on line 2 equals 10).(under development)

LAM BDA W EIGHT RADIUS M ODEL OM EGA

LAM BDA % Viscous dam ping F


W EIGHT W eight/unit length. F
If W EIGHT=0.0 then W GT on section properties is used. If both = 0.0 NO dam ping.
RADIUS Radius of Gyration of m ass about longitudinal axis. F
If RADIUS=0.0 then radius obtained from SQRT(Jxx/A) or SQRT((Izz+Iyy)/A)
M ODEL = 0; Russell Model, I
= 1; Sorrentino Model
= 2; Kelvin-Voigt Model
= 3;
OM EGA = 0; Omega=2*(omegai * omegaj)/(omegai + omegaj) F
= 1; Omega=(omegai + omegaj)/2
= 2; Use com puted frequencies omegai and omegaj
< 0; User supplied (-Omega) is used

36
15g. M ember Initial Fixed End Forces (only if ICOND = 1)

M 1z M 2z V1z V2z M 1y M 2y V1y V2y AXIAL AXPS TORQUE IOP

M 1z Fixed-end m om ent about z-z axis at End 1 F


M 2z Fixed-end m om ent about z-z axis at End 2 F
V1z Fixed-end shear force about z-z axis at End 1 F
V2z Fixed-end shear force about z-z axis at End 2 F
M 1z Fixed-end m om ent about y-y axis at End 1 F
M 2z Fixed-end m om ent about y-y axis at End 2 F
V1z Fixed-end shear force about y-y axis at End 1 F
V2z Fixed-end shear force about y-y axis at End 2 F
AXIAL Axial force applied to m em ber (0.5 to each end) F
AXPS Axial prestress in the m em ber F
TORQUE Torque applied to m em ber about x-x axis (0.5 to each end) F
IOP = 0; Prestress force is internal to the m em ber only (Default) I
= 1; Prestress force also acts on nodes at ends of the m em ber.

Note: The prestress force which is Tension positive affects only the internal m em ber axial force used in the
determ ination of yield states and has no effect on the static analysis of the structure.
The Axial force applied to the m em ber is positive if it acts in the direction K to L and one half of this force
is applied to each of the nodes at the ends of the m em ber.
The Torque is positive if it applies a positive right-hand m om ent about the m em ber going from end K to
L and one half of this torque is applied to each of the nodes at each end of the m em ber.

Frame M ember Initial Fixed End Force Sign Convention

Positive m em ber m om ents cause tensile stresses on the bottom (- y or - z) fibres and positive shear forces act
in the local y or z directions on the positive local x face of the beam section. Tensile axial forces are positive.
As an exam ple if a downward (- y) load is applied to the above m em ber M 1z, M 2z and V1z are negative while
V2z is positive.

37
15h. M ember Initial Distributed Loads (only if ICOND = 2)

UDLx UDLy UDLz TORQUE AXPS IOP

UDLx Distributed Load per unit length in the local x direction. F


UDLy Distributed Load per unit length in the local y direction. F
UDLz Distributed Load per unit length in the local z direction. F
TORQUE Torque per unit length applied to m em ber about x-x axis F
AXPS Axial prestress in the m em ber F
IOP = 0; Prestress force is internal to the m em ber only (Default) I
= 1; Prestress force also acts on nodes at ends of the m em ber.

Note: The prestress force which is Tension positive affects only the internal m em ber axial force used in the
determ ination of yield states and has no effect on the static analysis of the structure unless IOP=1.
The Axial force applied to the m em ber is positive if it acts in the direction K to L and one half of this force
is applied to each of the nodes at the ends of the m em ber.
The Torque is positive if it applies a positive right-hand m om ent about the m em ber going from end K to
L and one half of this torque is applied to each of the nodes at each end of the m em ber.

Frame M ember Force and M oment Sign Convention.

38
15i. BEAM Yield Axial Forces and Yield Torques and Flexural Interaction Parameter

PYT PYC TY+ TY- ALFA IEND

PYT Axial force for tensile yield ( $ 0.0) F


PYC Axial force for com pression yield ( # 0.0) F
TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F
TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Flexural Interaction Factor assum ed to be the sam e for all flexural actions F
= 0; There is no Interaction between flexural yield in the z-z and y-y axes
> 1; There is an interaction between the flexural yield m om ents about the
z-z and y-y axes. This is independent of the axial force.
In this case 1.0 # ALFA # 2.0
IEND = 0; The flexural yield surface is the sam e at both ends of the m em ber I
= 1; Different yield surfaces are applicable at each end of the m em ber

Note: If both axial yield forces are zero then axial yield is suppressed and sim ilarly if both yield torques are zero
then torsion yield is suppressed. Both axial and torsional behaviour follows the bi-linear hysteresis rule.

The interaction surface between yield m om ent in the z-z and y-y axes when ALFA is greater than or equal to 1.0
is given by

where the interaction diagram is sym m etric about the m om ents (M yz+ + M Yz-)/2.0, (M Yy+ + M Yy-)/2.0 and the
surface lim iting m om ents M Yz* and M Yy* are given by the yield m om ents in each direction about this centre
position.

If ALFA equals 2.0 the surface is elliptical. If ALFA equals 0.0 the surface is a rectangle.

Flexural z-z and y-y interaction diagram.

39
15ii. BEAM Flexural Yield Conditions (End 1)

M yz+ M yz- M yy+ M Yy-

M Yz+ Positive yield m om ent about z-z axis ( $ 0.0) F


M Yz- Negative yield m om ent about z-z axis ( # 0.0) F
M Yy+ Positive yield m om ent about y-y axis ( $ 0.0) F
M Yy- Negative yield m om ent about y-yaxis ( # 0.0) F

Note: If both positive and negative yield m om ents at a hinge are zero then yield at that hinge is suppressed.

15iii. BEAM Flexural Yield Conditions (End 2)

If IEND in line 15i above is non-zero then repeat the data in line 14ii above for the other end of the beam
m em ber.

40
15j. Reinforced Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 1) Yield Torques and Interaction Parameters

TY+ TY- ALFA BETA IEND

TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F


TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Interaction factor for the flexural term s in the interaction equation below F
Note 1.0 # ALFA # 2.0 usually 1.5
BETA Interaction factor for the axial term s in the interaction equation below F
Note 1.0 # BETA # 2.0
IEND =0; The flexural yield surface is the sam e at both ends of the m em ber I
=1; Different yield surfaces are applicable at each end of the m em ber

Note: If both yield torques are zero then torsional yield is suppressed. Axial yield is autom atically suppressed
in Beam -Colum n m em bers but the axial yield forces are required to form the Axial Force - Mom ent yield
interaction surface. Torsion follows a bi-linear hysteresis rule.

The yield interaction surface (Mirza et al) is given by the following equation

where Py is PC when the axial force P is less (m ore com pressive) than PB and equal PT when the axial force
P is greater (m ore tensile) than PB. The values recom m ended by Hsu for BETA and ALFA for rectangular and
square tied colum ns are 1.0 and 1.5 respectively. Bresler found that ALFA varied from 1.15 to 1.55 and
recom m ended that 1.5 be used for rectangular sections and that 1.75 be used for square sections. Furlong
recom m ended that ALFA be 2.0.

Interaction Diagram for Reinforced Concrete


Beam-Columns

41
15jj. Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 1) Yield Surface at End 1 of member

PC PB M Bz M By PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


PB Axial com pression force at balance point ( < 0.0) F
M Bz Yield m om ent at P = PB about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
M By Yield m om ent at P = PB about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

Notes: 1. The yield m om ents are sym m etric in both flexural yield m om ent directions
i.e. M Yz+ = -M Yz- and M Yy+ = -M Yy-.
2. If M Bz or M By are zero then yield is suppressed in bending about that flexural axis. The yield
interaction below then operates only in the P, M y or P, M z plane.

14jjj. Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 1) Flexural Yield Conditions (End 2)

If IEND in line 15j above is non-zero then repeat the data in line 14jj above for the other end of the beam -
colum n m em ber.

42
15k. Steel BEAM -COLUM N Yield Torques and Interaction Parameters

TY+ TY- ALFA BETA M U NU GAM M A IEND

TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F


TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Interaction factor for the z-z axis yield m om ents then interaction equation F
Note 1.0 # ALFA
BETA Interaction factor for the axial force effect on z-z axis m om ents F
Note 0.0 is taken as infinity
MU Interaction factor for the y-y axis yield m om ents in the interaction equation F
Note 1.0 # M U
NU Interaction factor for the axial force effect on y-y axis m om ents F
Note 0.0 is taken as infinity
GAM M A Interaction factor for the axial term s in the interaction equation below. F
Note 1.0 # GAM M A
IEND =0; The flexural yield surface is the sam e at both ends of the m em ber I
=1; Different yield surfaces are applicable at each end of the m em ber

Note: If both yield torques are zero then torsional yield is suppressed. Axial yield is autom atically suppressed
in Beam -Colum n m em bers but the axial yield forces are required to form the Axial Force - Mom ent yield
interaction surface. Torsion follows a bi-linear hysteresis rule.

The yield interaction surface (Chen and Atsuta) is given by the following equation

where P y is PC when the axial force P is com pressive and equal PT when the axial force P is tensile. As
discussed by Chen for W ide Flange sections, where the z-z axis is the m ajor principal axis, M U m ay be taken as
1.0 and NU as infinity (i.e. in this program 0.0). This then sim plifies the interaction equation to

43
Interaction Diagram for Steel Beam-Columns

44
15kk. Steel BEAM -COLUM N Yield Surface at End 1 of member

PC M Yz M Yy PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


M Yz Yield m om ent about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
M Yy Yield m om ent about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

Notes: 1. The yield m om ents are sym m etric in both flexural yield m om ent directions
i.e. M Yz+ = -M Yz- and M Yy+ = -M Yy-.
2. If M Bz or M By are zero then yield is suppressed in bending about that flexural axis. The yield
interaction below then operates only in the P,M y or P,M z plane.

14kkk. Steel BEAM -COLUM N Flexural Yield Conditions (End 2)

If IEND in line 15k above is non-zero then repeat the data in line 14kk above for the other end of the
beam -colum n m em ber.

45
15l. Quadratic BEAM -COLUM N Yield Axial Forces and Yield Torques and Flexural Interaction
Parameter

PYT PYC TY+ TY- ALFA IEND

PYT Axial force for tensile yield ( $ 0.0) F


PYC Axial force for com pression yield ( # 0.0) F
TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F
TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Flexural Interaction Factor assum ed to be the sam e for all flexural actions F
=0; There is no Interaction between flexural yield in the z-z and y-y axes
>1; There is an interaction between the flexural yield m om ents about the
z-z and y-y axes. This is independent of the axial force.
In this case 1.0 # ALFA # 2.0
IEND =0; The flexural yield surface is the sam e at both ends of the m em ber I
=1; Different yield surfaces are applicable at each end of the m em ber

Note: Axial yield is suppressed in beam -colum n m em bers. If both yield torques are zero then torsion yield is
suppressed. Torsion is assum ed to follow the bi-linear hysteresis rule. The axial yield forces are required
to define the flexural yield surfaces.

The interaction surface between yield m om ent in the z-z and y-y axes when ALFA is greater than or equal to 1.0
is given by

where the interaction diagram is sym m etric about the m om ents (M yz+ + M Yz-)/2.0, (M yy+ + M Yy-)/2.0 and the
surface lim iting m om ents M Yz* and M Yy* are given by the yield m om ents in each direction about this centre
position. If P is com pression Py is PYC and if P is tension then Py is PYT.

If ALFA equals 2.0 the surface at any axial force is elliptical. If ALFA equals 0.0 the surface at any axial force is
a rectangle.

Flexural z-z and y-y interaction diagram .

46
15ll. Quadratic BEAM -COLUM N Yield Surface at End 1 of member

PBz M bz Pcz M Cz PBy M by PCy M Cy

PBz Axial force at B about z-z axis (PYT > PBz > PYC) F
M Bz Yield m om ent at B about z-zaxis ( > 0.0) F
PCz Axial force at C about z-z axis (PYT > PCz > PYC) F
M Cz Yield m om ent at C about z-z axis ( < 0.0) F
PBy Axial force at B about y-y axis (PYT > PBy > PYC) F
M By Yield m om ent at B about y-yaxis ( > 0.0) F
PCy Axial force at C about y-y axis (PYT > PCy > PYC) F
M Cy Yield m om ent at C about y-y axis ( < 0.0) F

15lll. Quadratic BEAM -COLUM N Flexural Yield Conditions (End 2)

If IEND in line 15l above is non-zero then repeat the data in line 14ll above for the other end of the beam -
colum n m em ber.

47
15m. Reinforced Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 2, Type 3 and Type 4) Yield Torques and Interaction
Parameters

TY+ TY- ALFA BETA IEND

TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F


TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Interaction factor for the flexural term s in the z-z direction F
Note: ALFA = 0.0 or ALFA $1.0
BETA Interaction factor for the flexural term s in the y-y direction F
Note: BETA = 0.0 or BETA $ 1.0
IEND =0; The flexural yield surface is the sam e at both ends of the m em ber I
=1; Different yield surfaces are applicable at each end of the m em ber

Note: If both yield torques are zero then torsional yield is suppressed. Axial yield is autom atically suppressed
in the Beam -Colum n m em bers but the axial yield forces are required to form the Axial Force - Mom ent
yield interaction surface. Torsion follows a bi-linear hysteresis rule.
If ALFA = 0.0 and BETA = 0.0 No M z - M y Interaction
If ALFA = 1.0 and BETA = 1.0 Linear M z - M y Interaction
If ALFA = 2.0 and BETA = 2.0 Elliptic M z - M y Interaction

The yield interaction surface (Penzien et al) is shown in the following figure where Pu is the current axial force
in the colum n and M zu and M yu are the current yield m om ents in the section.

Axial Force M oment Interaction Diagram

48
15mm. Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Types 2 3 and 4) Yield Surface at End 1 of member

PC PBz M Bz PBy M By M 0z M 0y PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


PBz Axial com pression force at balance point z-z axis ( < 0.0) F
M Bz Yield m om ent at P = PBz about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
PBy Axial com pression force at balance point y-y axis ( < 0.0) F
M By Yield m om ent at P = PBy about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
M 0z Yield m om ent at P = 0.0 about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
M 0y Yield m om ent at P = 0.0 about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

Notes: 1. The yield m om ents are sym m etric in both flexural yield m om ent directions
i.e. M Yz+ = -M Yz- and M Yy+ = -M Yy-.
2. If M Bz or M By are zero then yield is suppressed in bending about that flexural axis. The yield
interaction below then operates only in the P, M y or P, M z plane.

15mmm. Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Types 2 3 and 4) Flexural Yield Conditions (End 2)

If IEND in line 14m above is non-zero then repeat the data in line 14m m above for the other end of the
beam -colum n m em ber.

Note: In the Concrete Type 2 interaction diagram a single cubic function is passed through the four points with
axial forces and associated yield m om ents (P=Pc, M =0.0), (P=Pb, M =M b), (P=0.0,M =M 0) and (P=Pt,
M =0.0). The problem with this cubic function is that the m axim um yield m om ent is usually not at P=Pb
and it is often found that the cubic curve crosses the zero m om ent axis between Pb and Pc. If the
colum n design is such that the axial force usually lies between P = 0 and P = Pb this does not usually
cause difficulties. The user should use the program Surface (part of the Ruaum oko suite of program s)
to check out the form of the interaction surface.

In the Concrete Type 3 interaction diagram two separate cubic curves are used to represent the variation
of yield m om ent with axial force. In the region between P = Pb and P = Pc the cubic curve has a zero
gradient of m om ent with axial force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent at Pb), has a yield m om ent = M b at P
= Pb, has zero m om ent at Pc and the function tends to a straight line as P tends to Pc. In the region
between Pb and Pt a different cubic polynom ial is used, again, the cubic curve has a zero gradient of
m om ent with axial force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent at Pb), has a yield m om ent = M b at P = Pb, has
the yield m om ent = M 0 at P = 0.0 and zero m om ent at P = Pt. There is a risk that, depending on the
ratios of M b/M 0 and Pb/Pt, that the cubic curve m ay intersect the zero m om ent axis between P = 0.0 and
P = Pt. The program will print out a warning with the listing of the section properties in the Ruaum oko3D
output file if this is likely. Again, the program Surface m ay be used to check out the form of the
interaction curves.

In the Concrete Type 4 interaction diagram a cubic curve and a quartic curve are used to represent the
variation of yield m om ent with axial force. In the region between P = Pb and P = Pc the cubic curve has
a zero gradient of m om ent with axial force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent at Pb), has a yield m om ent =
M b at P = Pb, has zero m om ent at Pc and the function tends to a straight line as P tends to Pc. In the
region between Pb and Pt a quartic polynom ial is used, again, the quartic curve has a zero gradient of
m om ent with axial force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent at Pb), has a yield m om ent = M b at P = Pb, has
the yield m om ent = M 0 at P = 0.0 and zero m om ent at P = Pt and the functions tends to a straight line
as Pt is approached. There is a risk that, depending on the ratios of M b/M 0 and Pb/Pt, that the quartic
curve m ay an inflection between P = 0.0 and P = Pt. The program will print out a warning with the listing
of the section properties in the Ruaum oko3D output file if this is likely. Again, the program Surface m ay
be used to check out the form of the interaction curves.

49
In general, it is recom m ended that the Concrete Type 4 interaction diagram be used and not the Concrete
Type 2 or Concrete Type 3 interaction diagram s.

If the colum n has only 4 reinforcing bars, one in each corner then the Axial Force - Yield Mom ent takes
a m ore diam ond shaped form with a peak in the yield m om ents at P = Pb and zero yield m om ents at Pb
and Pt. In this case it is probably better to use the Concrete Type 1 interaction curve with the value of
BETA = 1.0 or slightly greater. This is likely to be the case only for the analysis of older reinforced
concrete structures. In m odern structures such reinforcem ent details are unlikely to satisfy the concrete
confinem ent requirem ents of current design standards. If there is longitudinal reinforcem ent steel along
the faces of the colum ns as well as the corners then the yield m om ent interaction diagram is m ore
rounded near Pb and the Concrete Types 2, 3 or 4 interactions are m ore suitable shapes.

50
15n. Flanged Cruciform Steel BEAM -COLUM N Yield Torques and Interaction Parameters

TY+ TY- BETA M U ALPHA DELTA GAM M A NU ETA IEND

TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F


TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
BETA Interaction factor for axial load variation F
MU Power factor for the axial force variation F
ALPHA Interaction factor for Kappa F
DELTA Interaction factor for Kappa F
GAM M A Interaction factor for Kappa F
NU Interaction factor for Kappa F
ETA Interaction factor for Kappa . F
IEND =0; The flexural yield surface is the sam e at both ends of the m em ber I
=1; Different yield surfaces are applicable at each end of the m em ber

Note: If both yield torques are zero then torsional yield is suppressed. Axial yield is autom atically suppressed
in Beam -Colum n m em bers but the axial yield forces are required to form the Axial Force - Mom ent yield
interaction surface. Torsion follows a bi-linear hysteresis rule.

The yield interaction surface (Valente, Nicioli and Rastelli) is given by the following equation

where P y is PC when the axial force P is com pressive and equal PT when the axial force P is tensile.
The power factor ê is given by

51
15nn. Flanged Cruciform Steel BEAM -COLUM N Yield Surface at End 1 of member

PC M Yz M Yy PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


M Yz Yield m om ent about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
M Yy Yield m om ent about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

Notes: 1. The yield m om ents are sym m etric in both flexural yield m om ent directions
i.e. M Yz+ = -M Yz- and M Yy+ = -M Yy-.
2. If M Bz or M By are zero then yield is suppressed in bending about that flexural axis. The yield
interaction below then operates only in the P,M y or P,M z plane.

15nnn. Flanged Cruciform Steel BEAM -COLUM N Flexural Yield Conditions (End 2)

If IEND in line 15n above is non-zero then repeat the data in line 15nn above for the other end of the
beam -colum n m em ber.

52
15o. In-elastic Shear Parameters (Only if IGA on line 15a is 1, 2 or 3)

One line for in-elastic shear for flexure about the local z-z axis if IGA = 1
One line for in-elastic shear for flexure about the local y-y axis if IGA = 2
Two lines, one each for in-elastic shear for flexure about the local z-z and y-y axes in turn, if IGA = 3

Vy Vcr Vcc Alfa R Duct1 Duct2 Vres Phi1 Phi2 Pres Ido

Vy Shear yield strength ( > 0.0) F


Vcr Shear cracking strength ( > 0.0) F
Vcc Shear crack closing Force ( > 0.0) F
Alfa Bi-linear factor, cracking to yield ( R < Alfa < 0.0) F
R Tri-linear factor after yield ( > 0.01) F
Duct1 Shear ductility where strength degradation starts F
If less than 1.0 then no shear strength degradation
Duct2 Shear ductility where shear strength degradation stops ( > Duct1) F
Vres Residual shear strength as proportion of Vy (0.01 # Vres < 1.0) F
Phi1 Flexural ductility where shear strength degradation starts F
If less than 1.0 then no shear strength degradation
Phi2 Flexural ductility where shear strength degradation stops ( > Phi1) F
Pres Residual shear strength as proportion of Vy (0.01 # Pres < 1.0) F
(Note: Vres*Pres*Vy m ust be som ewhat greater than Vcr)
Ido = 0; In-elastic shear yield m ay occur (default) I
= 1; Retrofit assum ed, m essage printed, shear rem ains elastic.
= 2: Failure assum ed, m essage printed, analysis term inated.

Notes: The flexural ductility used for the strength degradation is based on the flexural ductilities at the hinges
at the ends of the m em ber.

The action taken on the reaching of the shear yield strength follows the rules of Satyarno in his study
on the behaviour of shear-flexure interaction in fram ed structures.

The in-elastic shear follows the SINA hysteresis rule. Please see the Appendices.
Beta = Alfa and the rule assum es sym m etry in both force and displacem ent axes.

If Vy, the shear area or the shear m odulus are less than or equal to 0.0 then in-elastic shear is
disabled

SINA Hysteresis

53
15p. In-elastic Flange Shear-Link Parameters (Only if IGA on line 15a is 4, 5 or 6)

One line for in-elastic shear for flexure about the local z-z axis if IGA = 4
One line for in-elastic shear for flexure about the local y-y axis if IGA = 5
Two lines, one each for in-elastic shear for flexure about the local z-z and y-y axes in turn, if IGA = 6

Flex Bear V1 V2 V3

Flex Shear Link Initial Flexibility (Radians/unit m om ent) ( > 0.0) F


Bear Shear Link Flexibility after bolts bear ( < Flex) F
V1 Shear where flange splice first slips ( > 0.0) F
V2 Shear where bolt bearing begins ( > 1.1*V1) F
V3 Shear where splice slips in later cycles ( > 0.0) F

Notes: The joint flexibilities specified at the ends of the m em ber are com plem ented by the shear link flexibility
com puted for the shear link. The shear force at each end of the m em ber is used to adjust the joint
flexibility at that end of the m em ber.

There is no interaction between the flexural slip between the z-z and y-y axes.

Shear Link Behaviour

54
15q. Strength Degradation Data (Only if ILOS on line 15a is non-zero).
The sam e data is used for all four in-elastic actions

If ILOS is between 1 and 7, see Appendix A)

There are 4 lines of data required, one each for the Mzz hinges at ends 1 and 2 and one each for Myy hinges
at ends 1 and 2.

If ILOS=8 only,

ASCE/SEI 41-06 Perform ance Based Design Checks.

IASCE DATA1 DATA2 DATA3

Num ber denoting m em ber type Param eters Table


IASCE = 1; RC Beam flexure C ñ-ñ’/ñ bd, V/bdpf’ c 6-7 I
= 2; RC Beam flexure NC ñ-ñ’/ñ bd, V/bdpf’ c 6-7
= 3; RC Beam (shear controlled) - 6-7
= 4; RC Beam (Inadequate developm ent Hoop< d/2) - 6-7
= 5; RC Beam (Inadequate developm ent Hoop > d/2) - 6-7
= 6; RC Colum n (i) C P/A gf’ c, V/bdpf’ c 6-8
= 7; RC Colum n (i) NC P/A gf’ c, V/bdpf’ c 6-8
= 8; RC Colum n (ii) (controlled by shear) - 6-8
= 9; RC Colum n (iii) (Inadequate developm t) HoopSpace/d 6-8
=10; RC Colum n (iv) (P>0.7P 0) - 6-8
=11; RC Colum n (iv) (Other) - 6-8
=12; RC W all (confined ends) ((A-A’)fy-P)/Af’ c, V/Apf’ c 6-18
=13; RC W all (non-confined ends) ((A-A’)fy-P)/Af’ c, V/Apf’ c 6-18
=14; RC Coupling Beam C V/Apf’ c 6-18
=15; RC Coupling Beam NC . V/Apf’ c 6-18
=16; RC Coupling Beam (diagonal) - 6-18
=21; Steel Beam b f/2l f, h/t w 5-6
=22; Steel Colum n (P/Pcl < 0.2) b f/2l f, h/t w 5-6
=23; Steel Colum n (0.2 < P/Pcl < 0.5) b f/2l f, h/t w 5-6
=24; Steel Plate Shear W all . - 5-6
=35; Steel EBF Link b f/2l f, h/t w, e 5-6
DATA1 First param eter governing rotations and perform ance lim its from table F
DATA2 Second param eter governing rotations and perform ance lim its from table F
DATA3 Third param eter governing rotations and perform ance lim its from table F

55
If ILOS=9 only,

ASCE/SEI 41-13 Perform ance Based Design Checks.

IASCE DATA1 DATA2 DATA3

Num ber denoting m em ber type Param eters Table


IASCE = 1; RC Beam flexure C ñ-ñ’/ñ bd, V/bdpf’ c 10-7 I
= 2; RC Beam flexure NC ñ-ñ’/ñ bd, V/bdpf’ c 10-7
= 3; RC Beam (shear controlled) HoopSpace/d/2 10-7
= 4; RC Beam (Inadequate developm ent) HoopSpace/d/2 10-7
= 5; RC Beam (Inadequate em bedm ent) - 10-7
= 6; RC Colum n (i) P/A gf’ c, ñ 10-8
= 7; RC Colum n (i) (see IASCE-6) P/A gf’ c, ñ 10-8
= 8; RC Colum n (ii) P/A gf’ c, ñ, V/bdpf’ c 10-8
= 9; RC Colum n (iii) P/A gf’ c, ñ 10-8
=10; RC Colum n (iv) P/A gf’ c, ñ 10-8
=11; RC Colum n (iv) (see IASCE10) P/A gf’ c, ñ 10-8
=12; RC W all (confined ends) ((A-A’)fy-P)/Af’ c, V/Apf’ c 10-19
=13; RC W all (non-confined ends) ((A-A’)fy-P)/Af’ c, V/Apf’ c 10-19
=14; RC Coupling Beam C V/Apf’ c 10-19
=15; RC Coupling Beam NC . V/Apf’ c 10-19
=16; RC Coupling Beam (diagonal) - 10-19
=21; Steel Beam b f/2l f, h/t w 5-6
=22; Steel Colum n (P/Pcl < 0.2) b f/2l f, h/t w 5-6
=23; Steel Colum n (0.2 < P/Pcl < 0.5) b f/2l f, h/t w 5-6
=24; Steel Plate Shear W all . - 5-6
=35; Steel EBF Link b f/2l f, h/t w, e 5-6

DATA1 First param eter governing rotations and perform ance lim its from table F
DATA2 Second param eter governing rotations and perform ance lim its from table F
DATA3 Third param eter governing rotations and perform ance lim its from table F

There are 4 lines of data required, one each for the Mzz hinges at ends 1 and 2 and one each for Myy hinges
at ends 1 and 2.

After elem ent is set-up, the yield strengths and curvatures at yield are established and the strength
degradation param eters to follow the rules of ASCE-41 are set up in term s of m em ber ductilitiy and ILOS is
then internally reset to ILOS=7. At the end of the output file the ASCE perform ance assessm ent output for
the m em ber is provided.

ASCE-41 sets up the data in term s of hinge rotations. These are related to the curvatures used in Ruaum oko
in that the (joint rotation) = (joint curvature)*(plastic hinge length). The strength degradation ductilities for the
point C, D and E in Figure C2-1 of ASCE/SEI 41-06 and ASCE/SEI 41-13 are output during the static
analysis, or if there are no static loads, at the beginning of the tim e-history analysis.

Note in ASCE/SEI 41-13 the distinction between Prim ary and Secondary elem ents is not used and the sam e
lim its apply to both m em ber types.

The default output for BEAM or FRAM E m em ber deform ation is in term s of curvatures. It is possible to have
the output in hinge rotation by setting the flag on the Property Set line. This then applies to all BEAM and
FRAM E m em bers and the inform ation is passed to the post-processor program DYNAPLOT so that it knows
that rotations and not curvatures are used.

56
15r. Hysteresis Data (Only if required by Hysteresis Rule, see Appendix B).

For those rules which require sets of data, such SINA or Muto etc., then there are 4 sets of such data:
1: Flexure about z-z axis at End 1
2: Flexure about z-z axis at End 2
3: Flexure about y-y axis at End 1
4: Flexure about y-y axis at End 2

14s. Damage Index Data for Axial and Torsional Deformation (Only if IDAM G > 0).

M UAx+ M UAx- M UTx+ M UTx- BETA1 BETA2

M UAx+ Positive axial ultim ate ductility F


M UAx- Negative axial ultim ate ductility F
M UTx+ Positive twist ultim ate ductility F
M UTx- Negative twist ultim ate ductility F
BETA1 Park and Ang Beta Axial and Twist (Default = 0.05) F
BETA2 Park and Ang Beta Flexural z-z and y-y axes (Default = 0.05) F

14ss. Damage Index data for Flexural Deformations (Only if IDAM G > 0).

M U1z+ M U1z- M U2z+ M U2z- M U1y+ M U1y- M U2y+ M U2y

M U1z+ Positive ultim ate ductility about z-z axis (End 1) F


M U1z- Negative ultim ate ductility about z-z axis (End 1) F
M U2z+ Positive ultim ate ductility about z-z axis (End 2) F
M U2z- Negative ultim ate ductility about z-z axis (End 2) F
M U1y+ Positive ultim ate ductility about y-y axis (End 1) F
M U1y- Negative ultim ate ductility about y-y axis (End 1) F
M U2y+ Positive ultim ate ductility about y-y axis (End 2) F
M U2y- Negative ultim ate ductility about y-y axis (End 2) F

Notes: 1. All ultim ate ductilities m ust be greater than 2.0.


2. The ultim ate ductilities have no effect on the dynam ic analysis but are only used at the end of
the analysis to com pute the dam age indices.
3. See Appendix B for inform ation on which hysteresis rules will allow dam age indices to be
com puted.

57
16. Spring M embers

Spring M ember Geometry

Spring M ember Force and M oment Sign Convention.

58
16. SPRING type member properties

Order of all of the com ponents required for Spring Mem bers.

1 Control Param eters, see section 16a


2 Basic Section Properties, see section 16b
3 Material Specific Dam ping Param eters, only if ICTYPE in line 2 equals 5,7,8,9 or 10. See section 15c
4 Pre-loads, only if INCOND > 0, see section 16d
5 Yield Forces and Mom ents, except if IHYST = 0, 18 19, 33 or 37 or if ITYPE=4
For ITYPE = 1 2 or 3 See sections 16e and 16f
For ITYPE = 4 See section 16q
For ITYPE = 5 See sections 16e, 16f and 16h
For ITYPE = 6,7,8 or 9 See sections 16i through to sections 16l respectively
6 Shear-Flexure Interaction param eters, only if ITYPE=3 and IHYST > 0, see section 16g
7 If ISTOP on line 16a is non-zero, see lim it values on line 16m
7 Strength Degradation Param eters, only if ILOS > 0, see section 16n
8 Stiffness Degradation Param eters, only if IHYST > 0, see section 16o
9 Dam age Index data, only if IDAM G > 0, see sections 16p

59
16a. Control Parameters

ITYPE IHYST ILOS IDAM G INCOND ITRUSS SL Y0 Z0 ISTOP

ITYPE = 1; No interactions between X, Y or Z com ponents I


= 2; Interaction between Y and Z Yield Forces and Mom ents
= 3; Flexure-Shear Interaction. SINA hysteresis in Shear,
Bi-linear in Axial and Torsion.
= 4; Linear input General Sym m etric 6x6 Stiffness Matrix.
= 5; Y and Z Friction Force lim its function of X Force
= 6: Axial - y-z flexural interaction as for Reinforced Colum n Type 1
= 7: Axial - y-z flexural interaction as for Reinforced Colum n Type 2
= 8; Axial - y-z flexural interaction as for Steel Colum n
= 9; Axial - y-z flexural interaction as for General Quadratic Colum n
= 10; Axial - y-z flexural interaction as for Reinforced Colum n Type 3
= 11; Axial - y-z flexural interaction as for Reinforced Colum n Type 4
IHYST = n; Hysteresis rule. See Appendix B. I
ILOS = 0; No strength degradation See Appendix A I
= 1; Strength reduction in each direction based on ductility in that direction.
= 2; Strength reduction based on num ber of cycles
= 3; Strength reduction based on m axim um ductility
= 4; Strength reduction as for ILOS=1 above but strength reduction also with
num ber of inelastic cycles.
= 5; Strength reduction as for ILOS=4 above but strength reduces suddenly
at ultim ate ductility.
= 6; Strength reduction as for ILOS=3 above but strength reduction also with
num ber of inelastic cycles.
= 7; Strength reduction as for ILOS=6 above but strength reduces suddenly
at ultim ate ductility.
IDAM G = 0; No dam age indices com puted I
= m; Dam age indices com puted (m integer > 0 is used as a weight)
INCOND = 0; No initial Pre-load forces or m om ents on springs I
= 1; Initial Pre-load forces or m om ents applied.
ITRUSS = 0; All stiffnesses used as input. I
= 1: All stiffnesses divided by m em ber length (Default=1.0) (Truss Model)
SL Shift of position of Transverse Springs. (-0.5 # SL # 0.5)) F
(0.0 im plies that the Transverse Springs are located m idway between Nodes K and L
where SL = -0.5 m oves Springs to Node K and +0.5 m oves Springs to Node L)
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ISTOP = 0, No elem ent activity lim its I
= 1; Elem ent activity lim it on displacem ent
= 2; Elem ent activity lim it on average velocity
= 3; Elem ent activity lim it on average acceleration.

Note: If ITYPE = 3 then Dam age Indices IDAM G is reset to zero. The Shear term s (forces in the y and z
directions) m ust have sym m etric yield forces and the hysteresis and degrading strength inform ation m ust
follow the yield data. The axial and torsion term s are lim ited to a bi-linear in-elastic action. Any of the
allowed hysteresis rules for spring m em bers m ay be used for the rotation about the z-z and y-y axes.

If ITYPE = 4 then IHYST, ILOS, IDAM G and INCOND are zero. Supply data for sections 15a, 15b, 15c
(if required) and 15o only.

The transverse dashpots will generate m om ents at Nodes K and L by rigid lever arm s whose length will
depend on the length of the m em ber and the param eter SL

60
16b. Basic section properties

K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 W GT RF RT

K1 Spring Stiffness in the local X-direction F


K2 Spring Stiffness in the local Y-direction F
K3 Spring Stiffness in the local Z-direction F
K4 Rotational stiffness of the m em ber section about the local X axis F
K5 Rotational stiffness of the m em ber section about the local Y axis F
K6 Rotational stiffness of the m em ber section about the local Z axis F
W GT W eight/(unit length) of the m em ber F
RF Bi-linear Factor, or Ram berg-Osgood r, for translational springs F
RT Bi-linear Factor, or Ram berg-Osgood r, for rotational springs F

Notes:
1. The weight/unit length is used to com pute the m em ber m ass and does not contribute to the static loads
on the m em ber or the structure.
2. If the length of the m em ber is zero then the local x, y and z axes coincide with the global axes.

16c. M aterial Specific Damping Parameters (only if ICTYPE on line 2 equals 5 or 7).
Contributions of m em ber m atrices to Rayleigh Dam ping Matrix.

This option allows different sections to have their own values of ALPHA and BETA for Rayleigh Dam ping. This
is useful if one is m odelling a pounding study between two adjoining buildings where the buildings have different
dam ping characteristics or where different parts of the system have different dam ping characteristics, ie.e. in soil-
structure interaction studies. Dam ping m atrix C is given by

where M = Mass, = Initial Elastic Stiffness, = Current Tangent Stiffness.

BETA0 BETAT ALPHA

BETA0 Contribution of Initial Elastic Stiffness Matrix to Dam ping Matrix F


BETAT Contribution of Tangent Stiffness Matrix to Dam ping Matrix F
ALPHA Contribution of Mem ber Mass Matrix to Dam ping Matrix F

16cc. Hysteretic Damping Parameters. (only if ICTYPE on line 2 equals 8). (still under developm ent)

ALPHA IOP BETA

ALPHA Multiplier on Elastic Force , F


IOP = 0; Quadratic reduction approaching reversal I
= 1; Linear slope on reversal
BETA IOP = 0; Fraction of crossing velocity where reduction starts F
(0.0 < BETA <1.0) BETA =1.0 im plies Step at reversal (Default = 0.5)
IOP = 1; Multiplier of Stiffness on reversal (BETA> 1.0) (Default = 4.0)

61
16ccc. Elemental W ilson-Penzien (M odal) Damping Parameters. (only if ICTYPE on line 2 equals 9).

LAM BDA W EIGHT RADIUS IOP

LAM BDA % Viscous dam ping, F


W EIGHT W eight/unit length. F
If W EIGHT=0.0 then W GT on section properties is used. If both = 0.0 NO dam ping.
RADIUS Radius of Gyration of m ass about longitudinal axis. F
If RADIUS=0.0 then radius obtained from SQRT(Jxx/A) or SQRT((Izz+Iyy)/A)
IOP = 0; Dam ping coefficients rem ain constant with tim e. I
= 1; Dam ping coefficients updated as stiffness changes using a secant dam ping m odel.
= 2; Dam ping coefficients updated as stiffness changes using a tangent dam ping m odel.

16cccc. Convolution Damping Parameters. (only if ICTYPE on line 2 equals 10).

LAM BDA W EIGHT RADIUS M ODEL OM EGA

LAM BDA % Viscous dam ping F


W EIGHT W eight/unit length. F
If W EIGHT=0.0 then W GT on section properties is used. If both = 0.0 NO dam ping.
RADIUS Radius of Gyration of m ass about longitudinal axis. F
If RADIUS=0.0 then radius obtained from SQRT(Jxx/A) or SQRT((Izz+Iyy)/A)
M ODEL = 0; Russell Model, I
= 1; Sorrentino Model
= 2; Kelvin-Voigt Model
= 3;
OM EGA = 0; Omega=2*(omegai * omegaj)/(omegai + omegaj) F
= 1; Omega=(omegai + omegaj)/2
= 2; Use com puted frequencies omegai and omegaj
< 0; User supplied (-Omega) is used

62
16d. Pre-load forces and M oments (Only if INCOND is non-zero)

PSX PSY PSZ PM X PM Y PM Z IOP

PSX Pre-load force in the local X-direction F


PSY Pre-load force in the local Y-direction F
PSZ Pre-load force in the local Z direction F
PM X Pre-load m om ent about the local X axis F
PM Y Pre-load m om ent about the local Y axis F
PM Z Pre-load m om ent about the local Z-axis F
IOP = 0; Pre-load forces and m om ents are internal to the m em ber only. I
= 1; Pre-load forces and m om ents act as pre-loads that also affect the nodal
Forces acting on the nodes at the ends of the m em ber in the static
analysis of the structure.

Notes:
1. The pre-load forces are internal to the m em ber and have no contribution to the forces acting on the
structure. They affect only the initial m em ber deform ation before any structure deform ations are im posed.

16e. Yield Surface Forces (Only if IHYST not equal 0, 18, 19, 33 or 37 and ITYPE = 1,2 or 3)

FX+ FX- FY+ FY- FZ+ FZ- ALPHA

FX+ Positive spring yield force in the local X direction F


FX- Negative spring yield force in the local X direction F
FY+ Positive spring yield force in the local Y direction F
FY- Negative spring yield force in the local Y direction F
FZ+ Positive spring yield force in the local Z direction F
FZ- Negative spring yield force in the local Z direction F
ALPHA Power factor for Yield Interaction. (Only for ITYPE = 2) F

63
16f. Yield Surface M oments (Only if IHYST not equal 0, 18, 19, 33 or 37 and ITYPE = 1,2 or 3)

M X+ M X- M Y+ M Y- M Z+ M Z- BETA

M X+ Positive spring yield m om ent about the local X direction F


M X- Negative spring yield m om ent about the local X direction F
M Y+ Positive spring yield m om ent about the local Y direction F
M Y- Negative spring yield m om ent about the local Y direction F
M Z+ Positive spring yield m om ent about the local Z direction F
M Z- Negative spring yield m om ent about the local Z direction F
BETA Power factor for Yield Interaction. (Only for ITYPE = 2) F

Notes: 1. If any pair of yield forces or m om ents are zero the yield is suppressed for that com ponent of the
m em ber actions.

2. If ITYPE = 1 there is no interaction between the spring yield forces or the spring yield m om ents
and there is no interaction between the spring yield forces and the spring yield m om ents

3. If ITYPE = 2 there is an interaction between the spring yield forces in the y and z directions and
an interaction between the spring yield m om ents in the y and z directions. There is no interaction
between the spring yield forces and the spring yield m om ents

The interaction surface between yield forces in the z-z and y-y axes when ALFA is greater than
or equal to 1.0 is given by

where the interaction diagram is sym m etric about the m ean yield forces (Fyz+ + Fyz-)/2.0 and
(Fyz+ + Fyz-)/2.0 and the surface lim iting forces FYz* and FYy* are given by the yield forces in
each direction about this centre position.

If ALFA equals 2.0 the surface is elliptical. If ALFA equals 0.0 the surface is a rectangle.

The interaction surface between yield m om ent about the z-z and y-y axes when BETA is greater
than or equal to 1.0 is given by

where the interaction diagram is sym m etric about the m ean yield m om ents (M yz+ + M yz-)/2.0
and (M Yy+ + M Yy-)/2.0 and the surface lim iting m om ents M Yz * and M Yy* are given by the yield
m om ents in each direction about this centre position.

If BETA equals 2.0 the surface is elliptical. If BETA equals 0.0 the surface is a rectangle.

64
Yield Interaction Diagram for Y-Z Forces and M oments
ITYPE = 2 only

65
16g. Flexure-Shear Interaction. (Only if ITYPE = 3 and IHYST > 0).
3 lines required, 16g, 16gg and 16ggg

ALFA VCry VCcy VCrz Vccz HINGEy HINGEz Ido

ALFA Bi-linear factor from cracking to yield (0.4#ALFA#0.8) F


VCry Cracking Shear Force in the y direction (> 0) F
VCcy Crack Closing Shear Force in the y direction (> 0) F
VCrz Cracking Shear Force in the z direction (> 0) F
VCcz Crack Closing Shear Force in the z direction (> 0) F
HINGEy Plastic Hinge Length in the y direction (Default = 1.0) F
HINGEz Plastic Hinge Length in the z direction (Default = 1.0) F
Ido = 0; Inelastic Shear is perm itted I
= 1; Retrofit is assum ed. If shear yield is detected, as m essage is printed
Yield does not occur, the section stays on the post-cracking stiffness.
= 2; If shear yield is detected, a m essage is written and the analysis is
term inated.

Notes:
1. The SINA hysteresis rule BETA has the sam e value as ALFA. ALFA m ust be less than the bi-linear
factor RF, see section 15b.
2. The cracking force has the sam e values in the positive and negative directions.
3. The hinge lengths are not necessary but can be used to convert the hinge rotations to curvatures.
4. The SINA hysteresis rule governs the Shear (y or z actions). The cracking forces are sym m etric
about the origin. The strength loss in the y direction is based on the absolute values of the rotational
com ponent ductility about the z-z axis. Sim ilarly for the z direction shear..
5. The Shear Stiffness KY = G A S / L where G is the shear m odulus, A S is the Shear Area and L is the
plastic hinge length. The Flexural Stiffness GJ = E I / L where E is the elastic m odulus and I is the
second m om ent of area of the equivalent beam section. To get curvatures from the rotations divide
the rotations by the plastic hinge length L.
6. If Ido = 0 allows the norm al in-elastic shear to occur, such as in beam s. The case of Ido = 2 is for
colum ns where retrofit is assum ed to have been applied and the sequence of shear failure is to be
shown. W hen Ido = 3 is for the case where retrofit is assum e not to occur and shear failure in a
colum n im plies failure of the structure.

SINA Hysteresis

66
16gg. Flexure-Shear Interaction Degradation parameters.
(Only if ITYPE = 3 and IHYST > 0).

Phi1y Phi2y Presy Phi3y Duct1y Duct2y Vresy Duct3y

Phi1y Flexural ductility at which Shear strength starts to degrade ($1) F


Phi2y Flexural ductility at which Shear strength reaches residual strength F
(Minim um value is 1.5 Phi1y)
Presy Residual Shear strength when flexural ductility is greater than Phi2y F
Phi3y Flexural Ductility when shear strength = 1% of original F
=0; Strength = Presy*FYy where FYy is the shear yield strength.
Duct1y Shear ductility at which Shear strength starts to degrade ($1) F
Duct2y Shear ductility at which Shear strength reaches residual strength F
(Minim um value is 1.5 Duct1y)
Vresy Residual Shear strength when shearl ductility is greater than Duct2y F
Duct3y Shear Ductility when strength = 1% of original F
=0; Strength = Vresy*FYy

Note: Vresy*Presy*FYy m ust be som ewhat greater than Vcry, see section 15g.
If Phi1y is less than 1.0 then there is no degradation of strength with flexural ductility.
If Duct1y is less than 1.0 then there is no degradation of strength with shear ductility.
Shear in the y direction is associated with flexure about the local z-z axis

16ggg. Flexure-Shear Interaction Degradation parameters.


(Only if ITYPE = 3 and IHYST > 0).

Phi1z Phi2z Presz Phi3z Duct1z Duct2z Vresz Duct3z

Phi1z Flexural ductility at which Shear strength starts to degrade ($1) F


Phi2z Flexural ductility at which Shear strength reaches residual strength F
(Minim um value is 1.5 Phi1z)
Presz Residual Shear strength when flexural ductility is greater than Phi2z F
Phi3z Flexural Ductility when shear strength = 1% of original F
=0; Strength = Presz*FYz where FYz is the shear yield strength.
Duct1z Shear ductility at which Shear strength starts to degrade ($1) F
Duct2z Shear ductility at which Shear strength reaches residual strength F
(Minim um value is 1.5 Duct1z)
Vresz Residual Shear strength when shearl ductility is greater than Duct2z F
Duct3z Shear Ductility when strength = 1% of original F
=0; Strength = Vresz*FYz

Note: Vresz*Presz*FYz m ust be som ewhat greater than Vcrz, see section 15g.
If Phi1z is less than 1.0 then there is no degradation of strength with flexural ductility.
If Duct1z is less than 1.0 then there is no degradation of strength with shear ductility.
Shear in the z direction is associated with flexure about the local y-y axis

67
16h. Friction Limit Forces (Only if IYTPE = 5 and IHYST= 1)

F0 M U IOP ALPHA

F0 Constant contribution to Friction lim it force. ( > 0.0) F


MU Coefficient of friction. ( > 0.0) F
IOP = 0; Friction lim it force = F0-M U*(X Force) ( > 0.0) I
= 1; Friction lim it force = F0+M U*Abs(X Force) ( > 0.0)
ALPHA Power factor for Yield Interaction. (See yield interaction for ITYPE = 2) F

68
16i. Reinforced Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 1) Yield Torques and Interaction Parameters
(Only if ITYPE = 6 and IHYST > 0, Two lines of data required 16i and 16ii)

FYy+ FYy- FYz+ FYz- TY+ TY- ALFA BETA

FYy+ Positive yield shear force in y direction ( $ 0.0) F


FYy- Negative yield shear force in y direction ( # 0.0) F
FYz+ Positive yield shear force in z direction ( $ 0.0) F
FYz- Negative yield shear force in z direction ( # 0.0) F
TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F
TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Interaction factor for the flexural term s in the interaction equation below F
Note 1.0 # ALFA # 2.0 usually 1.5
BETA Interaction factor for the axial term s in the interaction equation below F
Note 1.0 # BETA # 2.0

Note: If both y and/or z yield shears and/or yield torques are zero then shear and/or torsional yield is
suppressed. Axial yield is autom atically suppressed in Beam -Colum n m em bers but the axial yield
forces are required to form the Axial Force - Mom ent yield interaction surface. Shear in the y and z
directions and torsion follow a bi-linear hysteresis rule.

The yield interaction surface (Mirza et al) is given by the following equation

where Py is PC when the axial force P is less (m ore com pressive) than PB and equal PT when the axial force
P is greater (m ore tensile) than PB. The values recom m ended by Hsu for BETA and ALFA for rectangular
and square tied colum ns are 1.0 and 1.5 respectively. Bresler found that ALFA varied from 1.15 to 1.55 and
recom m ended that 1.5 be used for rectangular sections and that 1.75 be used for square sections. Furlong
recom m ended that ALFA be 2.0.

Axial Force M oment


Interaction Diagram

69
16ii. Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 1) Yield Surface

PC PB M By M Bz PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


PB Axial com pression force at balance point ( < 0.0) F
M By Yield m om ent at P = PB about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
M Bz Yield m om ent at P = PB about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

Notes: 1. The yield m om ents are sym m etric in both flexural yield m om ent directions
i.e. M Yy+ = -M Yy- and M Yz+ = -M Yz-.
2. If M By or M Bz are zero then yield is suppressed in bending about that flexural axis. The yield
interaction below then operates only in the P, M y or P, M z plane.

70
16j. Reinforced Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 2, Type 3 and Type 4) Yield Torques and
Interaction Parameters
(Only if ITYPE =7, 10 or 11 and IHYST > 0, Two lines of data required 16j and 16jj)

FYy+ FYy- FYz+ FYz- TY+ TY- ALFA BETA

FYy+ Positive yield shear force in y direction ( $ 0.0) F


FYy- Negative yield shear force in y direction ( # 0.0) F
FYz+ Positive yield shear force in z direction ( $ 0.0) F
FYz- Negative yield shear force in z direction ( # 0.0) F
TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F
TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Interaction factor for the flexural term s in the y-y direction F
Note: ALFA = 0.0 or ALFA $1.0
BETA Interaction factor for the flexural term s in the z-z direction F
Note: BETA = 0.0 or BETA $ 1.0

Note: If both y and/or z yield shears and/or yield torques are zero then shear and/or torsional yield is
suppressed. Axial yield is autom atically suppressed in Beam -Colum n m em bers but the axial yield
forces are required to form the Axial Force - Mom ent yield interaction surface. Shear in the y and z
directions and torsion follow a bi-linear hysteresis rule.

If ALFA = 0.0 and BETA = 0.0 No M y - M z Interaction


If ALFA = 1.0 and BETA = 1.0 Linear M y - M z Interaction
If ALFA = 2.0 and BETA = 2.0 Elliptic M y - M z Interaction

The yield interaction surface (Penzien et al) is shown in the following figure where Pu is the current axial force
in the colum n and M yu and M zu are the current yield m om ents in the section.

Axial Force M oment Interaction Diagram

71
16jj. Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 2, Type 3 and Type 4) Yield Surface

PC Pby M by PBz M bz M 0y M 0z PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


PBy Axial com pression force at balance point y-y axis ( < 0.0) F
M By Yield m om ent at P = PBy about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
PBz Axial com pression force at balance point z-z axis ( < 0.0) F
M Bz Yield m om ent at P = PBz about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
M 0y Yield m om ent at P = 0.0 about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
M 0z Yield m om ent at P = 0.0 about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

Notes: 1. The yield m om ents are sym m etric in both flexural yield m om ent directions
i.e. M Yy+ = -M Yy- and M Yz+ = -M Yz-.
2. If M Bz or M By are zero then yield is suppressed in bending about that flexural axis. The yield
interaction below then operates only in the P, M y or P, M z plane.

Note: In the Concrete Type 2 interaction diagram a single cubic function is passed through the four points
with axial forces and associated yield m om ents (P=Pc, M =0.0), (P=Pb, M =M b), (P=0.0,M =M 0) and
(P=Pt, M =0.0). The problem with this cubic function is that the m axim um yield m om ent is usually not
at P=Pb and it is often found that the cubic curve crosses the zero m om ent axis between Pb and Pc.
If the colum n design is such that the axial force usually lies between P = 0 and P = Pb this does not
usually cause difficulties. The user should use the program Surface (part of the Ruaum oko suite of
program s) to check out the form of the interaction surface.

In the Concrete Type 3 interaction diagram two separate cubic curves are used to represent the
variation of yield m om ent with axial force. In the region between P = Pb and P = Pc the cubic curve
has a zero gradient of m om ent with axial force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent is at Pb), has a yield
m om ent = M b at P = Pb, has zero m om ent at Pc and the function tends to a straight line as P tends
to Pc. In the region between Pb and Pt a different cubic polynom ial is used, again, the cubic curve
has a zero gradient of m om ent with axial force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent at Pb), has a yield
m om ent = M b at P = Pb, has the yield m om ent = M 0 at P = 0.0 and zero m om ent at P = Pt. There is
a risk that, depending on the ratios of M b/M 0 and Pb/Pt, that the cubic curve m ay intersect the zero
m om ent axis between P = 0.0 and P = Pt. The program will print out a warning with the listing of the
section properties in the Ruaum oko3D output file if this is likely. Again, the program Surface m ay be
used to check out the form of the interaction curves.

In the Concrete Type 4 interaction diagram a cubic curve and a quartic curve are used to represent
the variation of yield m om ent with axial force. In the region between P = Pb and P = Pc the cubic
curve has a zero gradient of m om ent with axial force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent at Pb), has a yield
m om ent = M b at P = Pb, has zero m om ent at Pc and the function tends to a straight line as P tends
to Pc. In the region between Pb and Pt a quartic polynom ial is used, again, the cubic has a zero
gradient of m om ent with axial force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent at Pb), has a yield m om ent = M b at
P = Pb, has the yield m om ent = M 0 at P = 0.0 and zero m om ent at P = Pt and the functions tends to a
straight line as Pt is approached. There is a risk that, depending on the ratios of M b/M 0 and Pb/Pt,
that the quartic curve m ay an inflection between P = 0.0 and P = Pt. The program will print out a
warning with the listing of the section properties in the Ruaum oko3D output file if this is likely. Again,
the program Surface m ay be used to check out the form of the interaction curves.

72
In general, it is recom m ended that the Concrete Type 4 interaction diagram be used and not the
Concrete Type 2 or Type 3 interaction diagram s.

If the colum n has only 4 reinforcing bars, one in each corner then the Axial Force - Yield Mom ent
takes a m ore diam ond shaped form with a peak in the yield m om ents at P = Pb and zero yield
m om ents at Pb and Pt. In this case it is probably better to use the Concrete Type 1 interaction curve
with the value of BETA = 1.0 or slightly greater. This is likely to be the case only for the analysis of
older reinforced concrete structures. In m odern structures such reinforcem ent details are unlikely to
satisfy the concrete confinem ent requirem ents of current design standards. If there is longitudinal
reinforcem ent steel along the faces of the colum ns as well as the corners then the yield m om ent
interaction diagram is m ore rounded near Pb and the Concrete Types 2,3 or 4 interactions are m ore
suitable shapes.

73
16k. Steel BEAM -COLUM N Yield Torques and Interaction Parameters
(Only if ITYPE =8 and IHYST > 0, Two lines of data required 16k and 16kk)

TY+ TY- ALFA BETA M U NU GAM M A

FYy+ Positive yield shear force in y direction ( $ 0.0) F


FYy- Negative yield shear force in y direction ( # 0.0) F
FYz+ Positive yield shear force in z direction ( $ 0.0) F
FYz- Negative yield shear force in z direction ( # 0.0) F
TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F
TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Interaction factor for the z-z axis yield m om ents then interaction equation F
Note 1.0 # ALFA
BETA Interaction factor for the axial force effect on z-z axis m om ents F
Note 0.0 is taken as infinity
MU Interaction factor for the y-y axis yield m om ents in the interaction equation F
Note 1.0 # M U
NU Interaction factor for the axial force effect on y-y axis m om ents F
Note 0.0 is taken as infinity
GAM M A Interaction factor for the axial term s in the interaction equation below. F
Note 1.0 # GAM M A

Note: If both y and/or z yield shears and/or yield torques are zero then shear and/or torsional yield is
suppressed. Axial yield is autom atically suppressed in Beam -Colum n m em bers but the axial yield
forces are required to form the Axial Force - Mom ent yield interaction surface. Shear in the y and z
directions and torsion follow a bi-linear hysteresis rule.

The yield interaction surface (Chen and Atsuta) is given by the following equation

where P y is PC when the axial force P is com pressive and equal PT when the axial force P is tensile. As
discussed by Chen for W ide Flange sections, where the y-y axis is the m ajor principal axis, M U m ay be taken
as 1.0 and NU as infinity (i.e. in this program 0.0). This then sim plifies the interaction equation to

74
Interaction Diagram for Steel Beam-Columns

75
16kk. Steel BEAM -COLUM N Yield Surface

PC M Yy M yz PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


M Yy Yield m om ent about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
M Yz Yield m om ent about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

Notes: 1. The yield m om ents are sym m etric in both flexural yield m om ent directions
i.e. M Yy+ = -M Yy- and M Yz+ = -M Yz-.
2. If M By or M Bz are zero then yield is suppressed in bending about that flexural axis. The yield
interaction below then operates only in the P,M z or P,M y plane.

76
16l. Quadratic BEAM -COLUM N Yield Axial Forces and Yield Torques and Flexural Interaction
Parameter. (Only if ITYPE =9 and IHYST > 0, Two lines of data required 16l and 16ll)

PYT PYC FYy+ FYy- FYz+ FYz- TY+ TY- ALFA

PYT Axial force for tensile yield ( $ 0.0) F


PYC Axial force for com pression yield ( # 0.0) F
FYy+ Positive yield shear force in y direction ( $ 0.0) F
FYy- Negative yield shear force in y direction ( # 0.0) F
FYz+ Positive yield shear force in z direction ( $ 0.0) F
FYz- Negative yield shear force in z direction ( # 0.0) F
TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F
TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Flexural Interaction Factor assum ed to be the sam e for all flexural actions F
=0; There is no Interaction between flexural yield in the y-y and z-z axes
>1; There is an interaction between the flexural yield m om ents about the
y-y and z-z axes. This is independent of the axial force.
In this case 1.0 # ALFA # 2.0

Note: If both y and/or z yield shears and/or yield torques are zero then shear and/or torsional yield is
suppressed. Axial yield is autom atically suppressed in Beam -Colum n m em bers but the axial yield
forces are required to form the Axial Force - Mom ent yield interaction surface. Shear in the y and z
directions and torsion follow a bi-linear hysteresis rule.

The interaction surface between yield m om ent in the y-y and z-z axes when ALFA is greater than or equal to
1.0 is given by

where the interaction diagram is sym m etric about the m om ents (M Yy+ + M Yz-)/2.0, (M Yz+ + M Yz-)/2.0 and
the surface lim iting m om ents M Yy* and M Yz* are given by the yield m om ents in each direction about this
centre position. If P is com pression Py is PYC and if P is tension then Py is PYT.

If ALFA equals 2.0 the surface at any axial force is elliptical. If ALFA equals 0.0 the surface at any axial force
is a rectangle.

16ll. Quadratic Flexural z-z and y-y interaction diagram .

77
BEAM -COLUM N Yield Surface

PBy M By Pcy M Cy PBz M Bz PCz M Cz

PBy Axial force at B about y-y axis (PYT > PBy > PYC) F
M By Yield m om ent at B about y-yaxis ( > 0.0) F
PCy Axial force at C about y-y axis (PYT > PCy > PYC) F
M Cy Yield m om ent at C about y-y axis ( < 0.0) F
PBz Axial force at B about z-z axis (PYT > PBz > PYC) F
M Bz Yield m om ent at B about z-zaxis ( > 0.0) F
PCz Axial force at C about z-z axis (PYT > PCz > PYC) F
M Cz Yield m om ent at C about z-z axis ( < 0.0) F

78
16m. Activity Limits. (only if ISTOP on line 16a is non-zero)

(If these are exceed the analysis will term inate)

One line of data required lines)

X+ X- Y+ Y- Z+ Z- ThetaX+ ThetaX- TheatY+ ThetaY- ThetaZ+ ThetaZ-

X+ Longitudinal or x lim it deform ation F


X- Longitudinal or x lim it deform ation F
Y+ Transverse or y lim it deform ation F
Y- Transverse or y lim it deform ation F
Z+ Transverse or z lim it deform ation F
Z- Transverse or z lim it deform ation F
ThetaX+ Longitudinal or x lim it rotation F
ThetaX- Longitudinal or x lim it rotation F
ThetaY+ Transverse or y lim it rotation F
ThetaY- Transverse or y lim it rotation F
ThetaZ+ Transverse or z lim it rotation F
ThetaZ- Transverse or z lim it rotation F

Notes:
1. If ISTOP = 1 the lim its are m em ber displacem ents
2 If ISTOP = 2 the lim its are m em ber average velocities
3. If ISTOP = 3 the lim its are m em ber average accelerations
4. A zero value im plies no lim it.

79
16n. Strength Degradation Data (Only if ILOS on line 16a is non-zero, see Appendix A)

16o. Hysteresis Data (Only if required by Hysteresis Rule, see Appendix B).

For those rules which require sets of data, such SINA or Muto etc.:
ITYPE= 1, 2 or 3 there are 6 sets of data
1: Axial effects in local X direction
2: Shear effects in local Y direction
3: Shear effects in local Z direction
4: Torsional effects about local X axis
5: Rotational effects about local Y axis
6: Rotational effects about local Z axis
ITYPE= 3 there are 2 sets of data
1: Rotational effects about local Y axis
2: Rotational effects about local Z axis
ITYPE= 4 no data required
ITYPE= 5, 6, 7 or 8 there are two sets of data
1: Rotational effects about local Y axis
2: Rotational effects about local Z axis

80
16p. Spring Damage Index Data for Spring Displacements (Only if IDAM G > 0).
(Two lines of data required lines 16o and 16oo)

M UX+ M UX- M UY+ M UY- M UZ+ M UZ- BETA1

M UX+ Positive ultim ate ductility in local X direction F


M UX- Negative ultim ate ductility in local X direction F
M UY+ Positive ultim ate ductility in local Y direction F
M UY- Negative ultim ate ductility in local Y direction F
M UZ+ Positive ultim ate ductility in local Z direction F
M UZ- Negative ultim ate ductility in local Z direction F
BETA1 Park and Ang Beta Displacem ent (Default = 0.05) F

16oo. Spring Damage Index Data for Spring Rotation (Only if IDAM G > 0).

M Ux+ M Ux- M uy+ M Uy- M Uz+ M Uz- BETA2

M Ux+ Positive ultim ate rotational ductility about local X axis F


M Ux- Negative ultim ate rotational ductility about local X axis F
M Uy+ Positive ultim ate rotational ductility about local Y axis F
M Uy- Negative ultim ate rotational ductility about local Y axis F
M Uz+ Positive ultim ate rotational ductility about local Z axis F
M Uz- Negative ultim ate rotational ductility about local Z axis F
BETA2 Park and Ang Beta rotation (Default = 0.05) F

Notes: 1. All ultim ate ductilities m ust be greater than 2.0.


2. The ultim ate ductilities have no effect on the dynam ic analysis but are only used at the end of
the analysis to com pute the dam age indices.
3. See Appendix B for inform ation on which hysteresis rules can allow dam age indices to be
com puted

81
16q. Off-Diagonal Terms for Linear General Spring M ember Stiffness M atrix
(Only for ITYPE=4)

Five lines of data containing the Off-diagonal term s of the stiffness m atrix. The diagonal term s are provided
by K1, K2, K3, K4, K5 and K6 respectively on line 15b.
Each line contains the term s for one row of the above diagonal part of the m atrix.
The stiffness m atrix is assum ed to be sym m etric and is linear elastic.

K12 K13 K14 K15 K16

K23 K24 K25 K26

K34 K35 K36

K45 K46

K56

Kij Jth coefficient in row I of the stiffness m atrix. F

82
17. DAM PER (dash-pot) type member properties

Damping or Dash-pot M embers

17a. Basic Dash-pot Parameters

ITYPE C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 GAP+ GAP- ALFA LIM IT SL KOP Y0 Z0

ITYPE =0 Linear dash-pot I


=1 Non-linear dash-pot
=2 Non-linear dash-pot with different properties in Positive and Negative
Directions
=3 Different dam ping coefficients when increm ental velocity and velocity have
opposite signs than when they have the sam e sign
C1 Longitudinal coefficient along x-x axis F
C2 Transverse coefficient along y-y axis F
C3 Transverse coefficient along z-z axis F
C4 Rotational coefficient about x-x axis F
C5 Rotational coefficient about y-y axis F
C6 Rotational coefficient about z-z axis F
GAP+ Positive Gap along x-x axis F
GAP- Negative Gap along x-x axis F
ALFA Velocity Power Factor (ALFA > 0.0) (Default = 1.0) (Only if ITYPE > 0) F
LIM IT =0 No lim its on dashpot forces and m om ents I
=1 Lim its set on dashpot forces and m om ents
SL Shift of position of Transverse Dashpots. (-0.5 # SL # 0.5)) F
(0.0 im plies that the Transverse dashpots are located m idway between Nodes K and L
where SL = -0.5 m oves dashpots to Node K and +0.5 m oves dashpots to Node L)
KOP =0 Dam ping force is given by C*Velocity^Alfa I
=1 Ram berg-Osgood backbone curve is used, ALFA (>1.0) is used as the
Ram berg Osgood power factor (Only if ITYPE=1 or 2)
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F

83
Notes:
1. C1, C2, C3, C4, C5 and C6 are the dash-pot coefficients (force / unit velocity) for the different actions
in the m em ber.
2. These m em bers are only included in the tim e-history analysis if IPANAL = 2, 3, 4, 5, 8 or 9 when they
are added to the dam ping m atrix.
3. Sign Conventions are the sam e as those for the SPRING m em ber types, see section 15.
4. If the length of a DAMPER type m em ber is zero then the local x, y and z axes coincide with the global
axes.
5. If the m em ber deform ation is within the range of the gap then the dashpot generates no force.
6. For linear dash-pot m em bers the force - velocity relationship is given by the following equation

7. For non-linear dash-pot m em bers the sam e ALFA is used for all com ponents. The force - velocity
relationship shows no hysteresis and the relationship is shown in the following equation

8. If ITYPE = 2 the dash-pot has different properties in the positive and negative directions and the rules
for the data in the negative direction are the sam e as those for the positive direction com ponents.
9. If IPLAS = 0, Elastic tim e-history analyses only, (see section 2, Principal analysis options) , then the
initial gaps are reset to zero after all the input data has been read and the ALFA values will be taken as
1.0.
10. If ITYPE = 3 then C1 to C6 are used when the velocity and increm ental velocity have the sam e sign and
C7 to C12 apply when the signs are not the sam e.
11. The transverse dashpots will generate m om ents at Nodes K and L by rigid lever arm s whose length will
depend on the length of the m em ber and the param eter SL

84
17b. Negative Direction Dash-pot Parameters (Only if ITYPE= 2 or ITYPE= 3)

C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 ALFA-

C7 Longitudinal coefficient along x-x axis F


C8 Transverse coefficient along y-y axis F
C9 Transverse coefficient along z-z axis F
C10 Rotational coefficient about x-x axis F
C11 Rotational coefficient about y-y axis F
C12 Rotational coefficient about z-z axis F
ALFA- Velocity Power Factor (ALFA > 0.0) (Default = 1.0) F

17c. Dash-pot Limit Forces and M oments (Only if LIM IT = 1)

FXmax Fxmin FYmax FYmin FZmax FZmin M Xmax M Xmin M Ymax M Ymin M Zmax M Zmin

FXmax Maxim um Force along x-x axis (Axial) F


FXmin Minim um Force along x-x axis (Axial) F
FYmax Maxim um Force along y-y axis F
FYmin Minim um Force along y-y axis F
FZmax Maxim um Force along z-z axis F
FZmin Minim um Force along z-z axis F
M Xmax Maxim um Mom ent about x-x axis (Torque ) F
M Xmin Minim um Mom ent about x-x axis (Torque) F
M Ymax Maxim um Mom ent about y-y axis F
M Ymin Minim um Mom ent about y-y axis F
M Zmax Maxim um Mom ent about z-z axis F
M Zmin Minim um Mom ent about z-z axis F

85
18. TENDON type member properties

Tendon M ember
Either Constant Force member

ITYPE FPP FPN FNN FNP GAP+ GAP- YO Z0

ITYPE =0; Sim ple Constant Force Tendon Mem ber I


FPP Force, Positive Displacem ent and Displacem ent Increasing F
FPN Force, Positive Displacem ent and Displacem ent Decreasing F
FNN Force, Negative Displacem ent and Displacem ent Decreasing F
FNP Force, Negative Displacem ent and Displacem ent Increasing F
GAP+ Positive Gap, No Force if Displacem ent less than this ($ 0) F
GAP- Negative Gap, No Force if Displacem ent greater than this (# 0) F
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F

Notes:
1. These m em bers are only included in the tim e-history analysis IPANAL > 1 when they are considered in
the equilibrium equations.
2. The m em ber action is assum ed to act along the local x-x axis.
3. Sign Convention: This is the sam e as for the SPRING m em bers. Tensile forces and m em ber elongations
are positive.
4. If the m em ber is of zero length then the TENDON local m em ber axes are assum ed to coincide with the
global x axis.

Constant Force M ember

86
Or Active Tendon Force member

ITYPE DELAY YO Z0

ITYPE =N; Num ber of Contributions to Tendon Force (N>0) I


DELAY Tim e Delay on Response (seconds). (Maxim um of 100 tim e-steps) F
FPP Saturation Force (Sam e value used in tension and com pression) F
IH = 0; Force com puted by actions as described below. I
= 1; Force com puted as below then passed to Resettable Actuator Hysteresis
W ith force treated as displacem ent with a stiffness of 1.0
= 2; Force com puted as below then passed to Two-Four dam per Hysteresis
W ith force treated as displacem ent with a stiffness of 1.0
BETA Sticking Force (Sam e value used in tension and com pression) (only if IH = 2) F
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F

Notes: The tim e delay is internally converted to an integer num ber of tim e-steps.
If FPP is greater than zero then the force is bounded by -FPP and +FPP. If FPP = 0.0 there are No
bounds
If IH > 0 then FPP m ust be greater then 0.0

Contribution of each com ponent - N lines required

NODE NDOF NTYPE FACTOR YO Z0

NODE Node Num ber I


NDOF =1; X com ponent at Node I
=2; Y com ponent at Node
=3; Z com ponent at Node
=4; è x com ponent at Node
=5; è y com ponent at Node
=6; è Z com ponent at Node
NTYPE =1; Nodal Acceleration I
=2; Nodal Velocity
=3; Nodal Displacem ent
FACTOR Multiplier of Action to give m em ber force contribution F
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F

Notes:
1. These m em bers are only included in the tim e-history analysis IPANAL > 1 when they are considered in
the dynam ic equilibrium equations.
2. The m em ber action is assum ed to act along the local x-x axis.
3. Sign Convention: This is the sam e as for the SPRING m em bers. Tensile forces and m em ber elongations
are positive.
4. If the m em ber is of zero length then the TENDON local m em ber axes are assum ed to coincide with the
global x axis.
5. Care m ust be taken when setting out the m agnitude and sign of the m ultiplier as an inept choice m ay
lead to very large displacem ents and loss of precision and failure of the analysis. The deform ation and
force in the m em ber is tension positive. The tendon m em ber in tension pulls on both joints with equal and
opposite forces. It is worth noting that if the displacem ent of the structure has an equivalent circular
frequency ù (radians/sec) then the m agnitude of the velocities are of the order of ù tim es the m agnitude
of the displacem ents and the m agnitude of the accelerations is ù 2 tim es the m agnitude of the
displacem ents.

87
Or Semi-Active Tendon, Resettable Actuator, member

ITYPE STIFF FPP DELAY YO Z0

ITYPE = -1 I
STIFF Equivalent stiffness (Force per unit displacem ent) F
FPP Saturation Force (Sam e value used in tension and com pression) F
DELAY Tim e Delay on Response (seconds). (Maxim um of 100 tim e-steps) F
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F

Notes:
1. These m em bers are only included in the tim e-history analysis IPANAL > 1 when they are considered in
the dynam ic equilibrium equations.
2. Sign Convention: Tensile forces and m em ber elongations are positive.
3. The force displacem ent relationship follows the Resettable Actuator Hysteresis rule, IHYST=43, please
see Appendix B. The equivalent yield values are Fy+ = +FPP and Fy- = -FPP where FPP is the
saturation force.
4. The saturation force FPP must be greater than zero
5. The tim e-delay is internally
converted to an integer num ber of tim e-
steps

88
Or Variable Force member

ITYPE STIFF ALFA DAM P BETA FPP YO Z0

ITYPE = -2 I
STIF Equivalent stiffness coefficient (Force per unit displacem ent) F
ALFA Power factor for elem ent displacem ent (ALFA > 0.0) F
DAM P Equivalent dam ping coefficient (Force per unit velocity) F
BETA Power factor for elem ent velocity (BETA > 0.0) F
FPP Saturation Force (Sam e value used in tension and com pression) F
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F

Notes:
1. These m em bers are only included in the tim e-history analysis IPANAL > 1 when they are considered in
the dynam ic equilibrium equations.
2. Sign Convention: Tensile forces and m em ber elongations are positive.
3. The force in the m em ber is given by the following relationship. The displacem ent is the elongation of the
m em ber and the velocity is the rate of change of m em ber length.

Force = STIF*(displacement) A L F A + DAM P*(velocity) B E T A

4. This m em ber is very useful where a dam per or spring m em ber is required where the power factors ALFA
and BETA are less than 1.0. In these cases the equivalent tangent stiffness or dam ping coefficients tend
to infinity when the displacem ent or the velocity tend to zero leading to num erical difficulties in the
analyses. In these lim iting cases the forces are usually sm all and large stiffness or dam ping coefficients
are not a problem as the tendon m em ber has neither stiffness or dam ping coefficients
5. If FPP is greater than 0.0 then the force is bounder by -FPP and +FPP. If FPP = 0.0 then this is
equivalent to inifinity

89
Or Semi-Active Tendon, Two-Four Damper, member

ITYPE STIFF BETA FPP DELAY YO Z0

ITYPE = -3 I
STIFF Equivalent stiffness (Force per unit displacem ent) F
BETA Sticking Force (Sam e value used in tension and com pression) F
FPP Saturation Force (Sam e value used in tension and com pression) F
DELAY Tim e Delay on Response (seconds). (Maxim um of 100 tim e-steps) F
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F

Notes:
1. These m em bers are only included in the tim e-history analysis IPANAL > 1 when they are considered in
the dynam ic equilibrium equations.
2. Sign Convention: Tensile forces and m em ber elongations are positive.
3. The force displacem ent relationship follows the Two-Four Dam per rule, IHYST=51, please see Appendix
B. The equivalent yield values are Fy+ = +FPP and Fy- = -FPP where FPP is the saturation force.
4. The saturation force FPP must be greater than zero
5. The tim e-delay is internally converted to an integer num ber of tim e-steps

Tw o-Four Damper M odel

90
19. CONTACT type member properties

Contact M embers

91
19a. Basic section properties

ITYPE IHYST KX CX M U FL M 1 M 2 INIT SL IGO ISLIP Y0 Z0

ITYPE =0; Dam ping Coefficient specified. I


=1; Percentage Fraction of Critical Dam ping specified.
=2; Coefficient of Restitution specified.
=3; Spherical Contact Isolation Surface Bearing (Dam ping as for ITYPE = 0)
=4; Pseudo Spherical Isolation Surface Bearing (Dam ping as for ITYPE = 0)
IHYST =n; Hysteresis rule. See Appendix B. (only IHYST = 5 or 19 allowed) I
(For ITYPE = 3 or 4, IHYST is autom atically reset to 1)
KX Spring Stiffness in the local x-direction F
CX Dam ping Coefficient in the local x-direction (ITYPE = 0 or ITYPE = 3) F
% Critical dam ping (ITYPE = 1)
Coefficient of restitution (ITYPE = 2)
MU Coefficient of Friction (acting in local y-z plane) F
FL Multiplier of Longitudinal x Stiffness for Transverse y or z stiffnesses F
(Default value FL= 1.0 if M U>0 else FL=0.0)
M1 Mass at End 1 (ITYPE =1 or ITYPE = 2) F
Radius of bearing at end K, concave to end L (ITYPE = 3)
0.0 (ITYPE = 0)
M2 Mass at End 2 (ITYPE = 1 or ITYPE = 2) F
0.0 (ITYPE = 0 or ITYPE = 3)
INIT =0; Mem ber does not act during the static analysis I
=1; Mem ber acts during static analysis. (Only the KX term is active)
(For ITYPE = 3 or 4, INIT is autom atically reset to 1)
SL Shift of position of Transverse friction elem ents (-0.5 # SL # 0.5)) F
(0.0 im plies that the Transverse elem ents are located m idway between Nodes K and L
where SL = -0.5 m oves elem ents to Node K and +0.5 m oves elem ents to Node L)
IGO =0; Dam ping works when m em ber is in contact I
=1; Dam ping works only when m em ber is com pressing.
ISLIP =0; Friction lim it applied to vector sum of friction forces I
=1; Friction lim it applied to Y and Z friction forces separately
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F

Notes:
1. If the length of the m em ber is zero then the local x, y and z axes coincide with the global axes.
2. The m em ber is assum ed to act along the local x axis.
3. Sign Convention: Tensile forces and m em ber elongations are positive.
4. These m em bers stiffness and dam ping m atrices are only included in the tim e-history part of the
analysis IPANAL = 2, 3, 4, 5, 8 or 9.
5. The Coefficient of restitution r (supplied as CX above) is related to the Percentage of Critical dam ping
ë by the following form ula

6. The Effective End m asses are only required if ITYPE is 1 or 2 and are used to generate the equivalent
fraction of critical dam ping in the m em ber. The m asses are usually taken as the m ass in the fram e at
the floor at that end of the m em ber.

92
7. The Fractions of Critical Dam ping (supplied as CX above or from ë in note 3) are related to the
Dam ping Coefficients in the fundam ental deform ation m ode of the m em ber by the following
expression where k is the current m em ber tangent stiffness and the m asses M 1 and M 2 are the
m asses at the ends of the m em ber

8. If the contact force is zero, i.e. the displacem ent is inside the gap, then there are no friction forces.
9. For ITYPE = 3, the Spherical isolation bearing Model the spherical bearing is assum ed to be at end K
and is concave towards end L of the m em ber. The bearing is assum ed to be a no tension m em ber
and the m em ber length reduces (increases the com pressive strain as the lateral displacem ent takes
place in the m em ber m oving out from the centre of the bearing) Friction acts tangentially to the
bearing surface. The bearing radius is taken as M 1. The m em ber m ay be of any length but is m ust
be noted that the local axis is along the line K to L. If the m em ber is short it m ay be advantageous to
increase the axial flexibility of the contact m em ber by reducing the axial flexibility of the m em bers to
which it is attached so that the total flexiblity along the line of contact is m aintained but at the sam e
tim e reducing the local stiffnesses and helping num erical stability of the analysis. As the bearing is
allowed to lift still provide a large tension yield force but allow a large tension gap in the hysteresis
data.
10. For ITYPE = 3 it is not recom m ended that the large displacem ent analyses INLGEO = 1 be used as
full testing with this option has not yet been carried out as when the geom etry changes the centre of
raduis of the bearing would also be assum ed to change.
11. For the Pseudo Spherical Isolation bearing the bearing has a lateral force proportional to the axial
force in the contact spring m ultiplied by the lateral displacem ent divided by the radius of the bearing.
The effective stiffness is constant.
12. The friction elem ents will generate m om ents at Nodes K and L by rigid lever arm s whose length will
depend on the length of the m em ber and the param eter SL

19b. Yield Surface (only required if ITYPE = 0,1 or 2 and IHYST = 5)

PX+ PX- RTEN

PX+ Positive spring yield force in the X direction F


PX- Negative spring yield force in the X direction F
RTEN Bi-Linear Factor in Tension F

93
19c. Hysteresis data . (Only if IHYST = 5 or IHYST = 19)
See Appendix B for the data required.

This will com plete the data for this m em ber type with ITYPE = 0, 1 or 2.

19d. Dynamic Friction Data (only required if ITYPE =3 or 4)

M UF RVEL

M UF Dynam ic Friction Coefficient F


RVEL Reference Velocity. The velocity where the Friction Coefficient reaches the Dynam ic F
Friction Coefficient

Note: There is a linear variation in the Friction Coefficient with velocity from the M U specified in line
18a above at zero velocity (the Static Friction Coefficient) to M UF when the absolute velocity
in the friction plane (norm al to the axis of the m em ber) reaches RVEL. If the absolute velocity
is greater than RVEL then the Friction Coefficient = M UF.
If a num ber less than or equal to zero is supplied for M UF then M UF = M U

94
20. QUADRILATERAL type member properties

Quadrilateral Finite Element

Order of all of the com ponents required for Quadrilateral Mem bers.

1 Basic Section Properties see section 19a.

20a. Basic section properties

ITYPE ISHEAR E NU THICK W GT IM EM B IM ATL IHYST ILOS IDIST

ITYPE = 0; Plane Stress and Plate Bending (Shell elem ent) I


= 1; Plane Stress only
= 2; Plane Strain only
= 3; Plate Bending only
ISHEAR = 0; Plate Shear Deform ation ignored I
= 1; Plate Shear Deform ation considered (only if ITYPE = 0 or 3)
E Elastic Modulus F
NU Poisson's Ratio F
THICK Thickness of the elem ent F
W GT W eight/(unit volum e) of the elem ent F
IM EM B = 0; Hybrid Stress Plane Elem ent (12 degrees of freedom ) I
= 1; Isoparam etric Plane Elem ent ( 8 degrees of freedom )
= 2; Hybrid Stress Plane Elem ent ( 8 degrees of freedom ) (Recom m ended)
IM ATL = 0; Isotropic m aterial, uses E and NU above. I
= 1; Anisotropic m aterial, com pliance supplied
= 2; Anisotropic Com pliance, plane and plate properties differ.
IHYST = 0; Linear Elastic m aterial I
ILOS = 0; No strength degradation I
IDIST = 0; No distributed Body Forces or Pressures I
= 1; Distributed Body Forces and/or Pressures applied to elem ent

Notes:
1. The weight/(unit volum e) is used to com pute the m em ber m ass and does not contribute to the static
loads on the m em ber or the structure.
2. The elem ent is a Hybrid Stress Type 2 quadrilateral finite elem ent. All four nodes m ust be distinct (i.e.
no triangles). The stress distribution is assum ed to have a cubic variation in both the x and y
directions and the elem ent edge displacem ents are assum ed to vary linearly along the elem ent edge
for the tangential displacem ent and to have a cubic variation along the edge for the norm al

95
displacem ent. The elem ent actually assum es a linear variation of thickness between nodes but in the
application within the program a constant thickness is assum ed. Three point Guassian quadrature is
used in each direction to integrate the flexibility m atrix and three point Guassian quadrature is used
for the integrals along the elem ent edges. Any reduction of the order of integration gives inaccurate
integrals and a higher order gives no change in the integrals.
3 The plate bending elem ent is a Hybrid Stress elem ent with a linear variation of bending m om ents in
the elem ent. The edge displacem ent have a cubic variation of plate displacem ent and a linear
variation of norm al slope along each edge.
4. The elem ent is assum ed, at present, to be linearly elastic.

In-Plane Force Sign Convention.

Plate Bending M oment Sign Convention

96
20b. Anisotropic M aterial (only if IM ATL = 1or 2 on section 19a)

If IM ATL = 1 then the com pliance m atrix [S] is used for both in-plane action and for plate bending.
If IM ATL = 2 then the com pliance m atrix [S] is used only for the in-plane actions

S11 S12 S22 S13 S23 S33

S11 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F


S12 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S22 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S13 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S23 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S33 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F

20c. Anisotropic M aterial (only if IM ATL = 2 on section 19a)

This com pliance m atrix [S] is used for the bending actions

S11 S12 S22 S13 S23 S33

S11 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F


S12 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S22 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S13 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S23 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S33 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F

20d. Quadrilateral Body Forces and/or Pressures (only if IDIST=1 on line 20a)

Gx Gy Gz Px Py Pz IOP

Gx Body Force in x direction (Force per unit volum e) F


Gy Body Force in y direction (Force per unit volum e) F
Gz Body Force) in z direction (Force per unit volum e) F
Px Pressure in local x direction (Force per unit area) F
Py Pressure in local y direction (Force per unit area) F
Pz Pressure in local y direction (Force per unit area) F
IOP = 0; Body Forces in local coordinate directions I
= 0; Body Forces in local coordinate directions

Notes: Body forces are such as gravitational forces acting on elem ent and are m ore com m only acting in a global
direction whereas pressures are usually acting on the surface of the elem ent

97
20e. M aterial Specific Damping (only if ICTYPE = 5 or 7on section 19a)

This option allows different sections to have their own values of ALPHA and BETA for Rayleigh Dam ping. This
is useful if one is m odelling a pounding study between two adjoining buildings where the buildings have different
dam ping characteristics or where different parts of the system have different dam ping characteristics, ie.e. in soil-
structure interaction studies. Dam ping m atrix C is given by

where M = Mass, = Initial Elastic Stiffness, = Current Tangent Stiffness.

BETA0 BETAT ALPHA

BETA0 Multiplier associated with Initial Stiffness F


BETAT Multiplier associated with Tangent Stiffness F
ALPHA Multiplier associated with Mass F

98
21 M ASONRY PANEL ELEM ENTS Properties.

These elem ents are designed to represent the behaviour of an unreinforced m asonry panel infill in a reinforced
concrete fram e. The m odel assum es that the infill is such that there are no gaps between the fram e and the panel.
As generally constructed in South Am erica the fram e is often placed after the panel is erected (Crisafulli, 1997).

The panel is m odelled with two parallel struts in each diagonal to represent the thrust carried across the panel in
diagonal com pression. A fifth strut, which acts between the two opposite diagonal carriers on the diagonal carrying
com pression, transfers the shear force between the top and bottom of the panel.

In general, the panel elem ents are rectangular but other geom etries are perm itted . The panel lies in the local x -
y plane and the local y axis is assum ed to be vertical. If the data is supplied then an Hybrid Stress Plate Bending
finite elem ent provides an elastic out-of-plane stiffness.

Five or Four lines of data required. An extra line will be required if the Material Specific Dam ping m odel is being
used.

M asonry Panel Elements

1. Control Data
2. Geom etric Data
3. General Properties
4. Strut Data (2 lines or 1 line)
5. Material Specific Dam ping Data (if ICTYPE=5 or 7 only)

99
21a. Control Data

ITYPE IHYST ISHEAR THICK W EIGHT IDIST

ITYPE = 0; Plane Panel Only I


= 1; Panel with Plate Bending Stiffness
IHYST = 0; Mem ber is elastic only. I
= 1; Mem ber is inelastic (IHYST actually =33)
ISHEAR = 0; Plate Shear Deform ation ignored I
= 1; Plate Shear Deform ation included (ITYPE = 1 Only)
THICK Thickness of Panel (assum ed uniform ) F
W EIGHT W eight per unit volum e. F
IDIST = 0; NO distributed Loads applied I
= 1; Distributed Loads Applied

Interior to Exterior Node Dimensions

21b. Geometric Data

HZ XO1 YO1 XO2 YO2 XO3 YO3 XO4 YO4

HZ Vertical separation between struts F


XO1 X distance from external node to internal node 1 F
YO1 Y distance from external node to internal node 1 F
XO2 X distance from external node to internal node 2 F
YO2 Y distance from external node to internal node 2 F
XO3 X distance from external node to internal node 3 F
YO3 Y distance from external node to internal node 3 F
XO4 X distance from external node to internal node 4 F
YO4 Y distance from external node to internal node 4 F

100
Diagonal Strut Area Displacement Relationship

Plate Bending M oment Sign Convention

101
21c. M aterial Properties

TO M U TM AX SSF KTF E PR

TO Bond shear strength F


MU Coefficient of friction F
TM AX Maxim um shear stress $ TO F
SSF Shear stress factor á s F
KTF Shear stiffness factor ã s F
E Elastic Modulus for Plate Bending Elem ent F
PR Poisson’s Ratio for Plate Bending Elem ent F

Notes:
The input data required for the application of the panel elem ent includes the param eters described in for defining
the cyclic axial behaviour of m asonry and the properties of the equivalent strut. In addition, the following variables
need to be defined in relation to the shear behaviour of the m asonry panel:

Vertical separation between struts, h z : values of h z between z/3 and z/2 seem s to lead to adequate results,
where z is the contact length between the panel and the fram e.

Horizontal and vertical offset, x o i and y o i: these param eters define the horizontal and vertical distance,
respectively, m easured from the external nodes to the internal nodes. This is intended to represent the reduction
of the dim ensions of the panel due to the depth of the fram e m em bers.

Bond shear strength, and coefficient of friction, ì: these param eters are usually obtained from direct shear
tests or following design specifications. It is recom m ended, however, the use of the reduced values resulting from
the m odified shear theory proposed by Crisafulli. This theory takes into account the com plex stress state in the
panel due to the com posite nature of m asonry.

M aximum shear stress, : this is the m axim um shear stress perm issible in the m asonry panel, whose value
can be selected from the shear failure envelope of m asonry. This is to avoid a large shear strength due to high
axial forces in the struts.

Shear stress factor, á s : this param eter defines the ratio of the m axim um shear stress to the average stress in the
m asonry panel. It norm ally varies from 1.40 to 1.65.

Shear stiffness factor, ã s : this factor represents the fraction of the total stiffness assigned to the shear spring,
usually ranging from 0.5 to 0.75 but should not exceed 0.85 to 0.90. The rem aining part, , is assigned to
the struts. The total stiffness of the panel elem ent is controlled by the strut area and the elastic m odulus.

Thickness of the panel, t: this is assum ed to be constant over the panel.

W eight per unit volume: this is used to calculate the m ass of the panel and is used only to form the structure
m ass m atrix. It does not contribute to loads on the structure.

102
Either

21d. Strut Hysteresis (see also A ppendix B IHYST=33)

FC FT UC UUL UCL EM O GUN RE

FC Com pressive strength (stress units) (FC < 0.0) F


FT Tensile strength (stress units) (FT > 0.0) F
UC Strain at FC (UC < 0.0) F
UUL Ultim ate strain (UUL < 0.0) (UUL # 1.5 UC) F
UCL Closing strain F
EM O Initial m asonry m odulus (EM O $ 2 FC/UC) F
GUN Stiffness unloading factor (GUN $ 1.0) F
ARE Strain reloading factor (ARE > 0.0) F

21dd. Strut areas

AREA1 AREA2 R1 R2 IENV

AREA1 Initial strut cross-sectional area (AREA1 > 0.0) F


AREA2 Final strut cross-sectional area (AREA2 # AREA1) F
R1 Displacem ent at 1 (R1 < 0.0) F
R2 Displacem ent at 2 (R2 # R1) F
IENV = 0 ; Sargin stress-strain envelope descending branch I
= 1 ; Parabolic stress-strain envelope descending branch

or

21e. Elastic Properties

EM O AREA1

EM O Elastic m odulus F
AREA1 Initial area of strut F

103
Notes:
FC The com pressive strength f' m è is the m ain param eter controlling the resistance of the strut. It m ust be noted
that FC does not represent the standard com pressive stress of m asonry but should be adopted taking into
account the inclination of the com pressive principal stresses and the m ode of failure expected in the
m asonry panel. See Crisafulli 1997.

FT Tensile strength f' t represents the tensile strength of the m asonry or the bond strength of the panel-fram e
interface, whichever is sm allest. The consideration of the tensile strength has been introduced in the
m odel in order to gain generality. However, results obtained from different exam ples indicate that the
tensile strength, which is generally m uch sm aller than the com pressive strength, has no significant
influence on the overall response. Therefore, in the absence of m ore detailed inform ation, the tensile
strength can be assum ed to be zero.

UC The strain at m axim um stress g' m usually varies between -0.002 and -0.005 and its m ain effect on the
overall response of the infilled fram e is the m odification of the secant stiffness of the ascending branch
of the stress-strain curve.

UUL The ultim ate strain g u is used to control the descending branch of the stress-strain relationship. W hen a
large value is adopted for, exam ple g u = 20 g' m , a sm ooth decrease of the com pressive stress is obtained.

UCL The closing strain g cl defines the lim it strain at which the cracks partially close and com pressive stresses
can be developed. Values of the closing strain ranging between 0 and 0.003 lead to results which agree
adequately with experim ental data. If a large negative value is adopted, for exam ple g cl = g u , this effect
is not considered in the analysis.

EM O The elastic m odulus E m o represents the initial slope of the stress-strain curve and its value can exhibit a
large variation. Various expressions have been proposed for the evaluation of the elastic m odulus of
m asonry. It is worth noting, however, that these expressions usually define the secant m odulus at a stress
level between 1/3 and 2/3 of the m axim um com pressive stress. In order to obtain an adequate ascending
branch of the strength envelope it is assum ed that E m o $ 2 f' m è / g' m .

GUN The unloading stiffness factor ã u n controls the slope of the unloading branch. It is assum ed to be greater
than or equal to 1.0 and usually ranges from 1.5 to 2.5.

ARE The reloading strain factor á re defines the point where the reloading curves reach the strength envelope.
The calibration of the hysteretic m odel for the axial behaviour of m asonry showed that good results are
obtained using values ranging between 0.2 and 0.4. However, higher values, for exam ple 1.5, are required
to m odel adequately the cyclic response of the infilled fram es. This is because other sources of nonlinear
behaviour, such as sliding shear, need to be indirectly considered in the response of the m asonry struts.

Four param eters are required to represent the cross-sectional area of the m asonry strut. These are the initial area
A m s1 = AREA1 and final area A m s2 = AREA2 and the axial displacem ents at which the cross-sectional area
changes, Ä R 1 = R1 and Ä R 2 = R2. In a sim plified m odel, it can be assum ed that AREA1 and AREA2 are the sam e
using a low value of the strut area to avoid an excessive increase in the axial strength. In a m ore refined analysis,
a higher value of the initial area can be adopted, whereas the final area can be reduced by about 10% to 30%.
The displacem ent R1 and R2 can be estim ated as g' m d m /5 and g' m d m (where d m is the length of the m asonry
strut) respectively, at least until m ore precise inform ation becom es available. Several em pirical expressions, which
are described in section 6.2.1.3 of the reference, have been proposed for the evaluation of the equivalent width
of the m asonry strut, whose value norm ally ranges from 0.1 to 0.25 of the diagonal length of the infill panel.

IENV The descending branch of the stress-strain curve is usually m odelled with a parabola instead of the curve
associated with Sargin's equation in order to obtain a better control of the response of the strut after the
m axim um stress has been reached.

104
21f. Quadrilateral Pressures (only if IDIST=1 on line 21a)

Px Py Pz IOP

Px Pressure in x direction (Force per unit area) F


Py Pressure in y direction (Force per unit area) F
Pz Pressure in y direction (Force per unit area) F
IOP = 0; Body Forces in local coordinate directions I
= 0; Body Forces in local coordinate directions

Notes: These pressures m ay represent actual pressures or else body forces such as gravitational forces acting
on elem ent. Body forces are m ore com m only acting in a global direction whereas pressures are usually
acting on the surface of the elem ent

21g. M aterial Specific Damping (only if ICTYPE = 5 or 7 on section 2)

This option allows different sections to have their own values of ALPHA and BETA for Rayleigh Dam ping. This is
useful if one is m odelling a pounding study between two adjoining buildings where the buildings have different
dam ping characteristics or where different parts of the system have different dam ping characteristics, ie.e. in soil-
structure interaction studies. Dam ping m atrix C is given by

where M = Mass, = Initial Elastic Stiffness, = Current Tangent Stiffness.

BETA0 BETAT ALPHA

BETA0 Multiplier associated with Initial Stiffness F


BETAT Multiplier associated with Tangent Stiffness F
ALPHA Multiplier associated with Mass F

105
22. GROUND type member properties

Foundation M ember Sign Convention

Beam Sign Convention

Foundation Mem bers

These m em bers can be regarded as a form of beam m em ber and m ay be used to represent the flexibility of the
soil continuum beneath foundation beam s and footings. The elem ents have a cubic variation of norm al thrust and
a linear variation of axial shear along their lengths so their edge displacem ents are fully com patible with beam
m em bers. Three possible representations of the soil are included:
Vlazov Foundation
General Two-Param eter Foundation (Pasternak m odel)
Vogt Foundation

The norm al force-deflection relationship of both the Vlazov and the General Two-Param eter Foundation m em bers
are governed by the following equation (Selvadurai,1979):

q(x) = k.w (x) – G(d 2 w /dx 2 )

In the Vlazov soil m odel, the param eters k and G are derived from the elastic properties of the soil and specified
constraints to the variation of norm al displacem ent of the soil with depth.

In the General Two-Param eter soil m odel, k and G are input directly by the user.

The Vogt foundation m odel was derived using Boussinesq’s form ulas and has been used in the past for m odelling
arch dam s (Holand, 1968; Clough,1973). In two-dim ensional analyses, the norm al force-deflection relationship
for the Vogt m odel is sim ilar to that of the Vlazov and General Two-Param eter soil m odels, but does not contain
a shear term . This m odel is analogous to a distributed W inkler spring.
The m odels can be regarded as ‘Pseudo-Dynam ic’ foundation com pliance m odels. They do not autom atically
account for the frequency dependence of the dynam ic stiffness of the soil. Such effects can be included by
appropriately scaling the input param eters to account for the fundam ental period of the com bined soil-structure
system .

The effects of radiation dam ping are incorporated into the Vlazov m odel by way of dashpots, placed in parallel with
the soil springs. Radiation dam ping is highly dependent on frequency and should only be included if the
fundam ental period of the com bined soil-structure system is below the fundam ental period of the site. Appropriate
scale factors for radiation dam ping and the elastic stiffness of the soil, as a function of the fundam ental frequency
of the soil-structure system , can be obtained from W olf (W olf, 1994)

106
Foundation m em bers should be placed beneath foundation beam s and footings and additional m em bers should
be provided to m odel the soil surface adjacent to the structure being m odelled. These m em bers should extend
either side of the structure at least two to three tim es the width of the structure.

These elem ents only act in the local x - y plane. They have no stiffness in the local z direction.

References:

Clough, Ray W et al,. ADAP – a computer program for static and dynamic analysis of arch dams. University of
California, Berkeley, California, 1973

Holand, Ivar and Aldstedt, Erik, Arch Dam Analysis by Finite Element Analysis, Institute for Structural Mechanics,
University of Trondheim , Norway, January 1968

Selvadurai, A. P. S., Elastic Analysis of Soil-Foundation Interaction. Developm ents in Geotechnical Engineering
Vol. 17, Elsevier Scientific Publishing Com pany, The Netherlands, 1979.

W olf, John P., Foundation Vibration Analysis Using Simple Physical Models. Prentice Hall , Englewood Cliffs, NJ,
1994.

Order of all data com ponents required for Ground Mem bers are:

General Data for Foundation Mem ber see section 21a.


Data for Soil Model
Vlazov Soil Model, ITYPE = 1, see section 21b.
Vlazov Soil Model, ITYPE = 2, see section 21c.
Vlazov Soil Model, ITYPE = 3, see section 21d.
Two-Param eter Soil Model, ITYPE = 4, see section 21e.
Vogt Foundation Model, ITYPE = 5, see section 21f.
Data for Non-linear foundation behavior,
Only if IHYSTA, IHYSTK or IHYSTG > 0, see section 21g.
Data for soil elem ent consistent m ass m atrix,
Only if ISTF = 1, see section 21h.
Data for soil elem ent radiation dam ping m atrix,
Only if IRAD = 1, see section 21i.
Data for Longitudinal Strength Degradation Param eters, see section 21j.
Data for Longitudinal Stiffness Degradation Param eters, see section 21k.
Data for Norm al Strength Degradation Param eters, see section 21l.
Data for Norm al Stiffness Degradation Param eters, see section 21m .
Data for Shear Strength Degradation Param eters, see section 21n.
Data for Shear Stiffness Degradation Param eters, see section 21o.
Data for Material Specific Dam ping (only if ICTYPE = 5 or 7), see section 21p.

107
22a. General Data for Foundation M ember

ITYPE ISHEAR IHYSTA IHYSTK IHYSTG ILOSA ILOSK ILOSG ISTF IRAD

ITYPE = 1; Vlazov Soil Model (Linear – shallow soils) I


= 2; Vlazov Soil Model (Hyperbolic – deep soils)
= 3; Vlazov Soil Model (Exponential – very deep soils)
= 4; General Two-Param eter Soil Model (Pasternak)
= 5; Vogt Soil Model
ISHEAR = 0; Shear term G(d 2 w/dx 2 ) included I
= 1; Shear term ignored (this is autom atic with the Vogt m odel)
IHYSTA = n; Longitudinal Spring Hysteresis rule. See Appendix B I
IHYSTK = n; Norm al Spring Hysteresis rule. See Appendix B I
IHYSTG = n; Shear Spring Hysteresis rule. See Appendix B I
ILOSA = 0; No Longitudinal spring strength degradation I
= 1; Longitudinal spring strength degradation varying with ductility
= 2; Longitudinal spring strength degradation with varying cycle num ber
= 3; Longitudinal spring strength degradation varying with absolute ductility
ILOSK Norm al Spring strength degradation param eter (as for ILOSA) I
ILOSG Shear Spring strength degradation param eter (as for ILOSA) I
ISTFS = 0; No scale factors for stiffness term s I
= 1; Scale factors for stiffness term s
IRAD = 0; No radiation dam ping included I
= 1; Radiation dam ping included

Note:
IHYSTA, IHYSTK and IHYSTG can take on values of 0,1,2,3,4,8,10,11,12,13,14,20,21,23,26 and 28 see
Appendix B.

22b. Data for Vlazov Soil M odel. Only if ITYPE = 1


(Linear Variation of Displacem ent with Depth – shallow soils)

EM M U DEPTH W EFF DENS

EM Elastic Modulus of soil F


MU Poisson’s Ratio of soil F
DEPTH Depth of soil layer above bedrock F
W EFF Effective W idth of Foundation F
DENS Mass density of soil F

Notes:
A linear variation of displacem ent with depth is only appropriate for shallow soil layers
The m odel is form ulated assum ing that Plane Strain conditions apply.

108
22c. Data for Vlazov Soil M odel. Only if ITYPE = 2
(Hyberbolic Variation of Displacem ent with Depth – deep soils)

EM M U DEPTH GAM A LENGTH W EFF DENS

EM Elastic Modulus of soil F


MU Poisson’s Ratio of soil F
DEPTH Depth of soil layer above bedrock F
GAM M A Effective Constant Defining Exponential Variation (0.001 # GAM M A # 1) F
LENGTH Characteristic Length F
W EFF Effective W idth of Foundation F
DENS Mass density of soil F

22d. Data for Vlazov Soil M odel. Only if ITYPE = 3


(Exponential Variation of Displacem ent with Depth – very deep soils)

EM M U M UB W EFF DENS

EM Elastic Modulus of soil F


MU Poisson’s Ratio of soil F
M UB Exponential Variation Param eter (1 < M UB*W EFF < 2) F
(M UB*W EFF = 1.06 for infinitely long beam s)
W EFF Effective W idth of Foundation F
DENS Mass density of soil F

22e. Data for Pasternak General Two-Parameter Soil M odel. Only if ITYPE = 4.

AS KS GS W EFF

AS Axial Stiffness of Soil Spring F


KS Modulus of Subgrade Reaction of soil F
GS Shear Modulus of soil F
W EFF Effective W idth of Foundation F

Note: KS has units of force-per-length-cubed and GS has units of force

22f. Data for Vogt Soil M odel. Only if ITYPE = 5

EM F PR KFACT W EFF

EM F Effective Elastic Modulus of soil layer F


PR Poisson’s Ratio of soil layer F
KFACT Vogt ‘k’ Factor (2 <= k <= 2.5) F
W EFF Effective W idth of Foundation F

109
22g. Data for Non-linear Foundation Behaviour (only if IHYSTA, IHYSTK or IHYSTG > 0)

PYTA PYCA PYT PYC TY BFA BFP BFT

PYTA Tensile Strength of Longitudinal Soil Spring F


PYCA Com pressive Strength of Longitudinal Soil Spring F
PYT Tensile Strength of Norm al Soil Spring F
PYC Com pressive Strength of Norm al Soil Spring F
TY Shear strength of Shear Soil Spring F
BFA Bilinear Factor (or Ram berg Osgood r) for Longitudinal Spring F
BFP Bilinear Factor (or Ram berg Osgood r) for Norm al Spring F
BFT Bilinear Factor (or Ram berg Osgood r) for Shear Spring F

Note: PYTA, PYCA, PYT, PYC and TY are in units of force per unit area

22h. Soil M ass Stiffness Scaling Parameters (Only if ISTF = 1)

AM ASS KM ASS GM ASS

AM ASS Scale factor for m ass associated with Longitudinal springs F


KM ASS Scale factor for m ass associated with Norm al springs F
GM ASS Scale factor for m ass associated with Shear springs F

Note: AM ASS, KM ASS and GM ASS can take values between 0.0 and 1.0

22i. Radiation Damping Input Parameters (Only if IRAD = 1)

ADAM P KDAM P GDAM P

ADAM P Scale factor for dam ping associated with Longitudinal springs F
KDAM P Scale factor for dam ping associated with Norm al springs F
GDAM P Scale factor for dam ping associated with Shear springs F

Notes:
ADAM P, KDAM P and GDAM P can take values between 0.0 and 1.0
Radiation dam ping is highly frequency dependent and scale factors should be evaluated according to
fundam ental frequency of the soil structure system .

110
22j. Longitudinal Strength Degradation Parameters (only if ILOSA > 0), see Appendix A.

22k. Longitudinal Stiffness Degradation Parameters (only if IHYSTA > 0), see Appendix B.

22l. Normal Strength Degradation Parameters (only if ILOSK > 0) see Appendix A.

22m. Normal Stiffness Degradation Parameters (only if IHYSTK > 0), see Appendix B.

22n. Shear Strength Degradation Parameters (only if ILOSG > 0), see Appendix A.

22o. Shear Stiffness Degradation Parameters (only if IHYSTG > 0), see Appendix B.

22p. M aterial Specific Damping (only if ICTYPE = 5 or 7 in section 2)

This option allows different sections to have their own values of ALPHA and BETA for Rayleigh Dam ping. This is
useful if one is m odelling a pounding study between two adjoining buildings where the buildings have different
dam ping characteristics or where different parts of the system have different dam ping characteristics, i.e. in soil-
structure interaction studies. Dam ping m atrix C is given by

where M = Mass, = Initial Elastic Stiffness, = Current Tangent Stiffness.

BETA0 BETAT ALPHA

BETA0 Multiplier associated with Initial Stiffness F


BETAT Multiplier associated with Tangent Stiffness F
ALPHA Multiplier associated with Mass F

111
23. M ULTI-SPRING type member properties

M ulti-Spring M ember

Notes:
1. Node 5 defines the local Y and Z axes in the sam e way as for all other line m em bers such as Fram e or
Spring m em bers. The local X axis is along the m em ber from node 3 to node 4.

2. If the m em ber is of zero length then the local axes are the sam e as the global axes.

3. If the Bi-Linear with Slackness hysteresis rule is used then this m em ber will becom e unstable if the whole
m em ber goes into tensile deform ation. This is because the elem ent has no stiffness if all the m ulti-springs
that m ake up the elem ent have positive (tensile) displacem ents. To prevent this instability a com pressive
force should be im posed across the m em ber either by loads applied to the structure or by other
prestressed m em bers acting across the m ulti-spring m em ber.

4. The sign convention for the individual springs is tensile forces and displacem ents are positive and for all
the other actions the sign convention is the sam e as that for the Spring m em ber.

5. For all available hysteresis m odels for this elem ent there is no further hysteresis data that is required.

6. If the Bi-linear with Gap hysteresis is used then the initial tension gap is set to 10 tim es the height (width)
HS of the elem ent. The com pression gap is set to zero. Other param eters for IHYST=5 take the default
values.

7. If the Bi-linear with Gap hysteresis and the Lift-off option is used then if all the axial springs lose contact
then all other spring actions are also set to zero and these other springs also have zero stiffness.

8. It is recom m ended that either the Lobatto or Gaussian quadrature rules be used. For a sm all num ber of
springs (i.e. 2) the Lobatto rule gives too large a stiffness and the Gaussian rule gives too sm all a stiffness.
W ith about 6 to 8 springs the stiffness has been found to m atch a detailed finite elem ent representation
of the stiffness of the contact region and exhibit the ‘corrrect’ shift of the neutral axis.

112
23a. Control Parameters.

IHYST ILOS KLOS IDAM G NS ITYPE HS W GT SL KHYST IO

IHYST =0 Linear Elem ent I


=1 Bi-linear with Gap Hysteresis (see IHYST = 5)
=2 Bi-linear Hysteresis (see IHYST = 2)
=3 Ram berg-Osgood Hysteresis (Original) (see IHYST = 3)
=4 Ram berg-Osgood Hysteresis (Bounded) (see IHYST = 40)
=5 Ram berg-Osgood Hysteresis (Pyke) (see IHYST = 41)
=6 Origin Centered Hysteresis (see IHYST = 38)
=7 Bi-linear Elastic Hysteresis (see IHYST = 15)
=8 Bi-linear with Gap Hysteresis and Lift-off (see IHYST = 5)
=9 Bi-linear Elastic with Gap (see IHYST = 63)
ILOS =0 No Longitudinal Strength Degradation I
= 1 to 7 Longitudinal Strength Degradation
KLOS =0 No Shear Strength Degradation I
= 1 to 7 Shear Strength Degradation
=8 ASCE-41 Perform ance Based Design Checks perform ed.
IDAM G =0 No Dam age Indices calculated I
=m Dam age Indices com puted with weight m (note: m =1 gives average)
NS Num ber of Springs, 2,4,6,8, or 10 (if -ve im plies dual set of springs) I
ITYPE =1 Lobatto Quadrature (Location and weighting of springs) I
=2 Gaussian Quadrature (Location and weighting of springs)
=3 Trapezoidal Integration (Location and weighting of springs)
=4 Uniform spring distribution and stiffness
HS Height of Multi-Spring m em ber F
W GT W eight of Multi-Spring m em ber F
SL Shift of position of Transverse springs. (-0.5 # SL # 0.5)) F
(0.0 im plies that the Transverse springs are located m idway between Nodes K and L
where SL = -0.5 m oves springs to Node K and +0.5 m oves springs to Node L)
If m odel has gap then tension gap=HS and com pression gap=0.0
KHYST Hysteresis rule for transverse springs. (Any of allowed rules for Multi-spring) I
IO =0 Individual springs have output to the post-processor file I
=1 Indivdual spring output to post-processor file suppressed

Notes:
1. The IHYST referred to in the parentheses above is the IHYST in Ruaum oko Appendices A and B covering
the various hysteresis rules. If IHYST is negative then the absolute values refers to any of the allowed
hyteresis rules for the Multi-spring elem ent.
2. The transverse springs will generate m om ents at Nodes K and L by rigid lever arm s whose length will
depend on the length of the m em ber and the param eter SL
3. If NS is supplied as a negative num ber, then this im plies a dual set of m ulti-springs. This is usually done
where the prim ary set of springs represents, say concrete, and the second set of springs represents, say
the steel reinforcem ent. Both sets of springs use the sam e num ber of springs (-NS) and the dual option
requires a second set of m aterial properties. In this case the first set of springs is usually using the Bi-
linear with gap hysteresis and the second set uses the bi-linear hysteresis.
4. If ILOS=8 then strength degradation data is generated by the program , from input selection of m em ber
type and control param eters, the equivalent ductilities for the rotation about the ;local z-z axis are
com puted and then the flag is reset to ILOS=7. The output file will list the ASCE-41 status flag for the
m em ber as part of the ASCE-41 listing for all m em bers undergoing the perform ance checks..

113
The Multi-spring elem ent was developed to m odel the behaviour of rocking joints as those seen at the ends of the
beam s in PRESSS type hybrid structures. The com m on m odelling of these joints has been as two springs located
at the bottom and top surfaces of the beam s, a m odel which is far too stiff, or as som e sort of rotational spring
which m ay give a representation of the rocking behaviour but NOT the elongation of the beam that the proper
rocking joint exhibits. W here the rotational spring has been used in rocking bridge pier m odels this elongation
effect m ay not be im portant but in a fram ed structure it can have very significant effects.

The difficulties in m odelling the m ulti-spring elem ent is largely that of defining the axial stiffness of the m em ber.
W ork by Spieth

Spieth,H.A., Carr,A.J., Murahidy,A.G., Arnolds,D., Davies,M. and Mander,J,M. "Modelling of Post-Tensioned


Precast Reinforced Concrete Fram Structures with Rocking Beam-Column Connection". Proc NZSEE conference,
Rotorua, NZ, March 2004.

with detailed non-linear 3D finite elem ent m odelling of both arm oured and un-arm oured rocking joints in concrete
beam s showed that the best results were in using about of 8 springs in the joint and taking the axial stiffness of
the joint as k=AE/H where AE is the axial area and elastic m odulus of the beam m em ber in which the joints are
acting and H, an effective length which was found to be around D/4 where D is the depth of the beam m em ber.
At 8 springs in the m ulti-spring the choice of G auss or Lobatto is not really significant, Gauss is too soft and
Lobatto is too stiff. It m atters greatly if the num ber of springs is 2 (a traditioonal m odel) or 4.

In Ruaum oko the m em ber can be of zero length if it wishes, but then is unable to show in the plots. The length
is arbitrary but should be given a length to let it be shown in the graphics. The operation is at a point given by the
param eter SL in the input data.

As part of the axial stiffness of the original beam of length L (AE/L) that has the rocking joints at its ends has been
taken by the rocking joints the cross section A that is used by the beam between the two end joints needs to be
adjusted to get the sam e axial stiffness acting between the colum n intersections. If the lengths chosen for each
of the m ulti-spring rocking joints is P (not to be confused with the H chosen for the stiffness of the m ulti-spring) then
the length of the beam between the joints in the m odel is Q = L-P-P. The original axial stiffness of the beam was
AE/L. The three m em bers are in series so the flexibilities of the three m em bers need to be equated with the original
flexibility. Let Aa be the axial area required in the central beam so that the flexibiloity between the colum n
intersections is m aintained then
L/(A*E) = H/(A*E)+H/(A*E)+P/(Aa*E)
as everything else is defined the Aa can be com puted.

The m ulti-s[ring, on its own, is not a stable m em ber it would need gravity (as a colum n base) or prestress (as a
beam ) to m ake it work if the "bi-linear with gap" (IHYST=5) hysteresis m odel is chosen. The prestress is usually
m odelled as a spring m em ber between beam -colum n joints and the prestress action MUST affect the structure.
The shear stiffness m ust be supplied (to represent the shear keys of other shear resistingm echanism across the
rocking joint orof the shear l-nk is Rigid(!) then this could be achieved by slaving the shear displacem ents at the
nodes at the two ends of the m ulti-spring.

Obviously, axial slaving is not possible with these m odels, it would stop the m ulti-spring elem ent working. There
is another aspect that will need consideration. One has now coupled tha acxial and flexural effects in the structure.
This m eans that the tim e-step required will be m uch-m uch sm aller than is norm ally used in fram e structure
analyses. One required a tim e step that is about a 1/4 of the shortest m ode period that m atters in your analysis
if the hysteresis m odels are able to track their hysteresis loops, som e experience say 0.1 of that period. The axial
displacem ents play an im portant part in the rocking behaviour of the joint and the axial stiffness of the beam s at
a floor is often very high giving very high local periods of free vibration. It will also be im portant to have a relatively
correct horizontal m ass at the nodes at the ends of the beam s with the rocking joints. Even m ass should be
applied at the joint between the m ulti-spring and the adjoining beam .

114
23b. Section Properties.

SAX SVY SVZ STX SRY RA RV Y0 Z0

SAX Axial Stiffness of Multi-spring unit F


SVY Shear Stiffness in local y-y direction F
SVZ Shear Stiffness in local z-z direction F
STX Torsional Stiffness of Multi-spring unit F
SRY Rotational Stiffness about the local y-y direction F
RA Bi-linear factor for Axial Stiffness Multi-spring unit F
RV Bi-linear factor for Shear, Torsional and Rotational y-y Stiffness F
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F

23c. Section Yield Properties.

YPA YNA YP2 YN2 YP3 YN3 TP1 TN1 M P2 M N2

YPA Axial Yield Force (Positive) F


YNA Axial Yield Force (Negative) F
YP2 Shear Yield Force in local y-y direction (Positive) F
YN2 Shear Yield Force in local y-y direction (Negative) F
YP3 Shear Yield Force in local z-z direction (Positive) F
YN3 Shear Yield Force in local z-z direction (Negative) F
TP1 Torsional Yield Mom ent (Positive) F
TN1 Torsional Yield Mom ent (Negative) F
M P2 Yield Mom ent about local y-y axis (Positive) F
M N2 Yield Mom ent about local y-y axis (Negative) F

Notes: If IHYST = 1 (i.e. Bi-linear with Slackness Hysteresis for the m ulti-spring unit) then
YPA = 0.0
If YNA = 0.0 then YNA is reset to -HS*SAX
The tension gap for the springs is set to HS.
If any of the other spring units have non-zero yield actions and IHYST is greater than 1 then these other
springs, unless KHYST has been specified, use the Bi-linear Hysteresis rule.
If IHYST = 0 then all springs are linear elastic

115
23d. Control Parameters for Dual set of Springs. (Only if NS in line 23a is negative)

JHYST SAX SA1 SA2 RA YPA YNA

JHYST =0 Linear Elem ent I


=1 Bi-linear with Gap Hysteresis (see IHYST = 5)
=2 Bi-linear Hysteresis (see IHYST = 2)
=3 Ram berg-Osgood Hysteresis (Original) (see IHYST = 3)
=4 Ram berg-Osgood Hysteresis (Bounded) (see IHYST = 40)
=5 Ram berg-Osgood Hysteresis (Pyke) (see IHYST = 41)
=6 Origin Centered Hysteresis (see IHYST = 38)
=7 Bi-linear Elastic Hysteresis (see IHYST = 15)
=8 Bi-linear with Gap Hysteresis and Lift-off (see IHYST = 5)
=9 Bi-linear Elastic with Gap (see IHYST = 63)
= -N W here N is any of the allowed hysteresis rules for the Mult–spring m em ber
SAX Axial Stiffness of Multi-spring unit F
SA1 Axial Stiffness Extra Spring at location of Spring 1 F
SA2 Axial Stiffness Extra Spring at location of Spring NS F
RA Bi-linear factor F
YPA Axial Yield Force (Positive) F
YNA Axial Yield Force (Negative) F

Notes:
1. The IHYST referred to in the parentheses above is the IHYST in Ruaum oko Appendices A and B covering
the various hysteresis rules.
.

116
23e. Strength Degradation Data (Only if ILOS on line 23a is non-zero).
The sam e data is used for all four in-elastic actions

If ILOS is between 1 and 7, see Appendix A)

If ILOS=8 only,

ASCE-41 Perform ance Based Design Checks.

IASCE DATA1 DATA2 DATA3

IASCE Num ber denoting m em ber type I


= 1; RC Beam (flexure conform ing) Table 6-7
= 2; RC Beam (flexure non-conform ing) Table 6-7,
= 3; RC Beam (shear controlled Table 6-7
= 4; RC Beam (Inadequate developm ent) Table 6-7
= 5; RC Beam (Inadequate em bedm ent) Table 6-7
= 6; RC Colum n (i) Table 6-8
= 7; RC Colum n (ii) Table 6-8
= 8; RC Colum n (iii) Table 6-8
= 9; RC Colum n (iv) Table 6-8
=10; RC W all (confined ends) Table 6-18;
=11; RC W all (non-confined ends) Table 6-18
=12; RC Coupling Beam (conform ing) Table 6-18
=13; RC Coupling Beam (non-conform ing) Table 6-18.
=14; RC Coupling Beam (diagonal) Table 6-18
DATA1 First param eter governing rotations and perform ance lim its from table F
DATA2 Second param eter governing rotations and perform ance lim its from table F
DATA3 Third param eter governing rotations and perform ance lim its from table F

After elem ent is set-up, the yield styrengths and curbatures at yield are established and the strength degradation
param eters to follow the rules of ASCE-41 are set up in term s of rotation ductility and ILOS is then internally reset
to ILOS=7. At the end of the output file the ASCE perform ance assessm ent output for the m em ber is provided.

23f. Shear Strength Degradation Parameters (only if KLOS > 0) see Appendix A.

117
23g. M aterial Specific Damping (only if ICTYPE = 5 or 7 in section 2)

This option allows different sections to have their own values of ALPHA and BETA for Rayleigh Dam ping. This is
useful if one is m odelling a pounding study between two adjoining buildings where the buildings have different
dam ping characteristics or where different parts of the system have different dam ping characteristics, i.e. in soil-
structure interaction studies. Dam ping m atrix C is given by

where M = Mass, = Initial Elastic Stiffness, = Current Tangent Stiffness.

BETA0 BETAT ALPHA

BETA0 Multiplier associated with Initial Stiffness F


BETAT Multiplier associated with Tangent Stiffness F
ALPHA Multiplier associated with Mass F

23h. M ulti-Spring Damage Index data (Only if IDAM G > 0).

M UX+ M UX- M UY+ M UY- M UR+ M UR- BETA1

M UX+ Positive ultim ate ductility (Longitudinal X direction) F


M UX- Negative ultim ate ductility (Longitudinal X direction) F
M UY+ Positive ultim ate ductility (Transverse Y direction) F
M UY- Negative ultim ate ductility (Transverse Y direction) F
M UZ+ Positive ultim ate ductility (Transverse Z direction) F
M UZ- Negative ultim ate ductility (Transverse Z direction) F
BETA1 Park and Ang Beta (Displacem ent) (Default = 0.05) F

23i. M ulti-Spring Damage Index data (Only if IDAM G > 0).

TUX+ TUX- TUY+ TUY- TUZ+ TUZ- BETA2

TUX+ Positive ultim ate ductility (Torsion) F


TUX- Negative ultim ate ductility (Torsion) F
TUY+ Positive ultim ate ductility (About local Y axis) F
TUY- Negative ultim ate ductility (About local Y axis) F
TUZ+ Positive ultim ate ductility (About local Z axis) F
TUZ- Negative ultim ate ductility (About local Z axis) F
BETA2 Park and Ang Beta (Rotation) (Default = 0.05) F

Notes: All Ultim ate Ductilities m ust be greater than 1.0.


The ultim ate ductilities have no effect on the dynam ic analysis but are only used at the end of the analysis
to com pute the dam age indices.
See Appendix B for inform ation on which hysteresis rules can allow dam age indices to be com puted.

118
24 COM POUND-SPRING type member properties

Compound-Spring Element

If the Bi-Linear with Slackness hysteresis rule is used, then care is required as this elem ent m ay becom e unstable
if all the springs are in the gap. To prevent this instability a forces m ay be im posed across the m em ber either by
loads applied to the structure or by other prestressed m em bers acting across the m em ber.

The individual springs, dashpots or tendons m aking up the com pound-spring m em ber have a sign convention
where tensile deform ations and forces are positive.

Compound Component Sign Convention

If the Interaction option is used for a com ponent then if the longitudinal (local x stiffness goes to zero) the
com ponent will disconnect until the axial stiffness again takes a non-zero value. This is sim ilar to the lift-off option
with the Multi-spring elem ent.

119
24a. Control Parameters.

NS JPLAS SL W GT IO Y0 Z0

NS Num ber of com ponents in m em ber (0 < NS # 20) I


JPLAS =0 Mem ber linear (elastic) I
=1 Mem ber non-linear
SL Shift of position of Transverse springs. (-0.5 # SL # 0.5)) F
(0.0 im plies that the transverse com ponents are located m idway between
Nodes K and L where SL = -0.5 m oves com ponents to Node K and +0.5 m oves
com ponents to Node L)
W GT W eight of Com pound-Spring m em ber F
IO =0 Individual springs have output to the post-processor file I
=1 Individual spring output to post-processor file suppressed
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F

Notes:
1. The transverse com ponents will generate m om ents at Nodes K and L by rigid lever arm s whose length
will depend on the length of the m em ber and the param eter SL The default position of the transverse
com ponents is at m id-length of the m em ber.
2. JPLAS is usually going to be 1 but this gives the ability for the m em ber data for a non-linear m em ber to
be input but that the actions are then reset to linear for the purposes of the analysis.
3. The weight is distributed half to each end of the com pound-spring. This is only used to generate the Mass
m atrix of the structure and does not contribute to the static loads on the structure.

Note sections 24b, 24c and 24d are required for each of the NS com ponents. Sections 24c and 24d, if required
m ust follow 24b for each com ponent in turn.

120
24b. Section Properties.

ITYPE IM ODE IHYST ILOS INTER Y Z ST RA YP YN

ITYPE =1 Longitudinal action (local x direction) I


=2 Transverse action (local y direction)
=3 Transverse action (local z direction)
=4 Torsional action (about local x axis)
=5 Rotational action (about local y axis)
=6 Rotational action (about local z axis)
IM ODE =1 Spring com ponent I
=2 Dashpot com ponent
=3 Tendon com ponent with force depending on sign of displacem ent
=4 Tendon com ponent with force depending on sign of velocity
=5 Internal pre-stress com ponent
IHYST Hysteresis rule. (For spring com ponents see Appendix B) I
(for other com ponents = 0 )
ILOS Strength Degradation rule. (For spring com ponents see Appendix A ) I
(for other com ponents = 0 )
INTER =0 No interaction between longitudinal and transverse/rotational action I
(Must be 0 for IM ODE = 5 or for ITYPE = 1)
=1 If axial contribution is zero all com ponents disconnect
Y Distance in y direction of com ponent from centre-line of m em ber (line of Nodes 3 and 4) F
(For rotational com ponents ITYPE = 2, 4, 5 or 6, reset to 0.0)
Z Distance in z direction of com ponent from centre-line of m em ber (line of Nodes 3 and 4) F
(For rotational com ponents ITYPE = 3. 4, 5 or 6 reset to 0.0)
ST Stiffness or dam ping coefficient of Com ponent (For IM ODE = 3, 4 or 5 use 0.0) F
RA Bi-linear factor or Ram berg-Osgood factor for Spring com ponent F
For non-linear dam pers, the power factor ALFA where (0.5 # ALFA # 2.0)
For all other com ponents = 0.0
YP For Spring m em bers (IM ODE = 1) = Yield Force ($0.0) F
For Dashpots (IM ODE = 2) = Lim it Force in positive direction ($0.0)
For Tendons (IM ODE = 3) = Force if displacem ent is positive (+ or -)
For Tendons (IM ODE = 4) = Force if velocity is positive (+ or -)
For Pre-stress (IM ODE = 5) = Prestress (+ or -)
YN For Spring m em bers (IM ODE = 1) = Yield Force (# 0.0) F
For Dashpots (IM ODE = 2) = Lim it Force in negative direction (+ or -)
For Tendons (IM ODE = 3) = Force if displacem ent is negative (+ or -)
For Tendons (IM ODE = 4) = Force if velocity is negative (+ or -)
For Pre-stress (IM ODE = 5) = 0.0

Notes:
1. For IM ODE = 3 or IM ODE = 4 if the displacem ent and the velocity are 0.0 the force in the tendon
com ponent is zero. These com ponents have no stiffness.
2. The dashpot com ponents IM ODE = 2 have no stiffness.
3. If IM ODE = 1, IHYST > 0 and YP # 0.0 and YN $ 0.0 then the com ponent is elastic.
The choice of hysteresis rule for the spring com ponent is the sam e as that for SPRING m em bers.
4. For IM ODE = 5, The pre-stress action is applied to the Spring m em bers (IM ODE=1) to m aintain
equilibrium in the Com pound Spring and these initial actions and deform ations becom e the base-line for
these com ponents. The other com ponents (IM ODE = 2,3 or 4 are not affected by the pre-stress actions).
5. The IM ODE = 5 com ponents hold their pre-stress action throughout the analysis and are not affected by
deform ation of the Com pound Spring.
6. The structure is not aware of the effect of the pre-stress in a com ponent of IM ODE = 5, it is internal to the
m em ber, as it is equilibrated inside the m em ber.
7. If IM ODE = 3 and YP = YN the force in the com ponent is constant at YP

121
24c. Strength Degradation Parameters (only if IM ODE = 1 and ILOS > 0), see Appendix A.

24d. Hysteresis Rule Datas (only if IM ODE = 1 and IHYST > 0 and the rule required m ore data)
see Appendix B.

24e. M aterial Specific Damping (only if ICTYPE = 5 or 7 in section 2)

This option allows different sections to have their own values of ALPHA and BETA for Rayleigh Dam ping. This
is useful if one is m odelling a pounding study between two adjoining buildings where the buildings have different
dam ping characteristics or where different parts of the system have different dam ping characteristics, i.e. in soil-
structure interaction studies. Dam ping m atrix C is given by

where M = Mass, = Initial Elastic Stiffness, = Current Tangent Stiffness.

BETA0 BETAT ALPHA

BETA0 Multiplier associated with Initial Stiffness F


BETAT Multiplier associated with Tangent Stiffness F
ALPHA Multiplier associated with Mass F

122
25. EXTERNAL M embers

External Spring M ember Geometry

External Beam M ember Geometry

123
Spring Component Sign Convention

External Beam M ember Force and M oment Sign Convention.

124
If the external elem ents are used then the program RuaLab m ust be started before starting Ruaumoko3D. This
establishes the pipe between the two program s.

For every External elem ent for each non-zero stiffness (Ki, i =1,6) in section 24a the counter NEXTL is
increm ented by 1. W hen all external m em bers have been initialized then NEXTL is the total num ber of external
action in the structure.

At each iteration and each tim e step, starting with the static analysis, the pipe transm its the following data with a
total of two write statem ents
1. The first write statem ent passes to 4byte integers, NIT and NEXTL where NIT is the iteration num ber
(starting at 1 for the increm ent itself) and NEXTL is the total num ber of external actions.
2. The second write passes two arrays, the first array of 4byte integers IEXTL is of length 3*NEXTL. The
data is passed as 3 integers for each action (m em ber num ber, action num ber (1 to 6), 0). The second
array is a double precision (8byte variable) array AEXTL which is of length 32*NEXTL. The 32 variables
for each action are:
1. Action deform ation
2. Increm ent of action deform ation
3. Action velocity
External Hysteresis Action
4. Action Stiffness
5. Action Bi-linear (or Ram berg-Osgood) factor
6. Positive Yield Action
7. Negative Yield Action
8-22 Hysteresis data
23. Num ber of tim es hysteresis leave hysteresis back-bone curve (half num ber of inelastic cycles)
24. Previous non-zero increm ental displacem ent
25.
26.
27. Maxim um envelop (m ost positive) action deform ation
28. Minim um envelop (m ost negative) action deform ation
29-32. Zero
External Experim ental Action
4-32. Zero

The data returned by the pipe is:


The first read statem ent has two 4byte integers, IERR and IDUM . If IERR is 0, then the response is
norm al, if IERR is greater than 1 then the experim ent is over, or the hysteresis rule has decided that the analysis
is over and the program proceeds to a norm al term ination with output of displacem ent, m em ber actions etc. If
IERR is less than 0 then an error has been detected and the analysis is term inated. The integer IDUM is not used.
The second read statem ent reads the arrays IEXTL and AEXTL whose dim ensions m atch the write
statem ent above. The array IEXTL is not used. The contents of the 32 item s for each action in AEXTL are
1. Action (force or m om ent)
2. Tangent Stiffness (Increm ent of action divided by increm ent of deform ation unless hysteresis rule
can give a better definition of the expected tangent stiffness for the next step).
3-22 Ignored
External Hysteresis Action,
23-28. Updated hysteresis loop data
29-30 Ignored
External Experim ent Action
23-32. Ignored

For hysteresis m odels that require m ore than the standard 6 item s used in all hysteresis m odes, then the
extra data m ust be stored in the local external program . In Ruaum oko there is provision to store 40 or m ore
variables that m ay need to be retained from one call to the hysteresis subroutine to the next.
If the Ruaum oko analysis has the variable IPLAS (data line 2) set to 0, i.e. a linearly elastic analysis, then
the pipe is not used and a dum m y routine m ultiplies the supplied stiffness by the deform ation to com pute the action
and this action and the original stiffness as the tangent stiffness are the two returned variables.

125
25a. External type member properties

Order of all of the com ponents required for Spring Mem bers.

1 Control Param eters, see section 24b


2 Basic Section Properties, see section 24c
3 Material Specific Dam ping Param eters, only if ICTYPE in line 2 equals 5 or 7. See section 24d
4 Yield Forces and Mom ents, except if ITYPE = 2 or ITYPE = 4
5 Hysteresis Data, except if ITYPE = 2 or ITYPE = 4

25b. Control Parameters

ITYPE S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 W GT SL Y0 Z0

ITYPE = 1; Spring Type Elem ent using external hysteretic m odel I


= 2; Spring Type Elem ent using external experim ental m odel
= 3; Beam Type Elem ent using external hysteretic m odel
= 4; Beam Type Elem ent using external experim ental m odel.

either (Spring type elem ents)


S1 Stiffness of Axial (local x-x) com ponent F
S2 Stiffness of Transverse (local y-y) com ponent F
S3 Stiffness of Transverse (local z-z) com ponent F
S4 Stiffness of Torsional (local x-x) com ponent F
S5 Stiffness of Rotational (local y-y) com ponent F
S6 Stiffness of Rotational (local z-z) com ponent F
W GT W eight of Elem ent F
SL Shift of position of Transverse Springs. (-0.5 # SL # 0.5)) F
(0.0 im plies that the Transverse springs are located m idway between Nodes K and L
where SL = -0.5 m oves springs to Node K and +0.5 m oves springs to Node L)
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F

or (Beam type elem ents)


S1 Axial Stiffness AE (local x-x) com ponent F
S2 Torsional Stiffness GJ (local x-x) com ponent F
S3 Stiffness of Flexural EI (local z-z) com ponent at End 1 F
S4 Stiffness of Flexural EI (local y-y) com ponent at End 1 F
S5 Stiffness of Flexural EI (local z-z) com ponent at End 2 F
(If equal to zero then perfect pin assum ed at End 2)
S6 Stiffness of Flexural EI (local y-y) com ponent at End 2 F
(If equal to zero then perfect pin assum ed at End 2)
W GT W eight of Elem ent F
SL Length of Plastic Hinge (all actions are assum ed to have the sam e length) F
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F

Notes:
1. If ITYPE = 1 or 3 then further data is required. IF ITYPE = 2 or 4 then no further data is required.
2. If the elem ent si a spring-like m em ber and the length of the m em ber is zero then the local x, y and z axes
coincide with the global axes. Beam -like m em bers must have a non-zero length.
3. Sign Convention is for Spring type m em bers (see section 15) or beam type m em bers (see section 14).

126
25c. Basic section properties

JTYPE r1 r2 r3 r4 r5 r6

JTYPE =1; No interaction in Yield Forces and Mom ents I


=2; Concrete Type 1 Interaction Axial to y-z m om ents
=3; Concrete Type 2 Interaction Axial to y-z m om ents
=4; Concrete Type 3 Interaction Axial to y-z m om ents
=5; Concrete Type 4 Interaction Axial to y-z m om ents
=6 Steel Interaction Axial to y-z m om ents
=7; General Interaction Axial to y-z m om ents

either (Spring Type m em bers)


r1 Bi-linear Factor, or Ram berg-Osgood r, for longitudinal spring F
r2 Bi-linear Factor, or Ram berg-Osgood r, for transverse y-y spring F
r3 Bi-linear Factor, or Ram berg-Osgood r, for transverse z-z spring F
r4 Bi-linear Factor, or Ram berg-Osgood r, for torsional springs F
r5 Bi-linear Factor, or Ram berg-Osgood r, for rotational y-y springs F
r6 Bi-linear Factor, or Ram berg-Osgood r, for rotational z-z springs F

or (Beam type m em bers)


r1 Bi-linear Factor, or Ram berg-Osgood r, for longitudinal spring F
r2 Bi-linear Factor, or Ram berg-Osgood r, for torsional springs F
r3 Bi-linear Factor, or Ram berg-Osgood r, for flexural z-z spring at End 1 F
r4 Bi-linear Factor, or Ram berg-Osgood r, for flexural y-y spring at End 1 F
r5 Bi-linear Factor, or Ram berg-Osgood r, for flexural z-z spring at End 2 F
r6 Bi-linear Factor, or Ram berg-Osgood r, for flexural y-y spring at End 2 F

25cc. M aterial Specific Damping Parameters (only if ICTYPE on line 2 equals 5 or 7).
Contributions of m em ber m atrices to Rayleigh Dam ping Matrix.

This option allows different sections to have their own values of ALPHA and BETA for Rayleigh Dam ping. This
is useful if one is m odelling a pounding study between two adjoining buildings where the buildings have different
dam ping characteristics or where different parts of the system have different dam ping characteristics, i.e. in soil-
structure interaction studies. Dam ping m atrix C is given by

where M = Mass, = Initial Elastic Stiffness, = Current Tangent Stiffness.

BETA0 BETAT ALPHA

BETA0 Contribution of Initial Elastic Stiffness Matrix to Dam ping Matrix F


BETAT Contribution of Tangent Stiffness Matrix to Dam ping Matrix F
ALPHA Contribution of Mem ber Mass Matrix to Dam ping Matrix F

127
25d. Yield Surface Forces (Only if ITYPE = 1 and JTYPE = 1. Two lines of data required 25d and 25dd)

FX+ FX- FY+ FY- FZ+ FZ-

FX+ Positive spring yield force in the local X direction F


FX- Negative spring yield force in the local X direction F
FY+ Positive spring yield force in the local Y direction F
FY- Negative spring yield force in the local Y direction F
FZ+ Positive spring yield force in the local Z direction F
FZ- Negative spring yield force in the local Z direction F

25dd. Yield Surface M oments (Only if ITYPE = 1 and JTYPE = 1)

M X+ M X- M Y+ M Y- M Z+ M Z-

M X+ Positive spring yield m om ent about the local X direction F


M X- Negative spring yield m om ent about the local X direction F
M Y+ Positive spring yield m om ent about the local Y direction F
M Y- Negative spring yield m om ent about the local Y direction F
M Z+ Positive spring yield m om ent about the local Z direction F
M Z- Negative spring yield m om ent about the local Z direction F

Notes: If any pair of yield forces or m om ents are zero the yield is suppressed for that com ponent of the
m em ber actions.

128
25e Reinforced Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 1) Yield Torques and Interaction Parameters
(Only if ITYPE = 1 and JTYPE =2, Two lines of data required 25e and 25ee)

FYy+ FYy- FYz+ FYz- TY+ TY- ALFA BETA

FYy+ Positive yield shear force in y direction ( $ 0.0) F


FYy- Negative yield shear force in y direction ( # 0.0) F
FYz+ Positive yield shear force in z direction ( $ 0.0) F
FYz- Negative yield shear force in z direction ( # 0.0) F
TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F
TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Interaction factor for the flexural term s in the interaction equation below F
Note 1.0 # ALFA # 2.0 usually 1.5
BETA Interaction factor for the axial term s in the interaction equation below F
Note 1.0 # BETA # 2.0

Note: If both y and/or z yield shears and/or yield torques are zero then shear and/or torsional yield is
suppressed. Axial yield is autom atically suppressed in Beam -Colum n m em bers but the axial yield forces
are required to form the Axial Force - Mom ent yield interaction surface. Shear in the y and z directions
and torsion follow a bi-linear hysteresis rule.

The yield interaction surface (Mirza et al) is given by the following equation

where Py is PC when the axial force P is less (m ore com pressive) than PB and equal PT when the axial force
P is greater (m ore tensile) than PB. The values recom m ended by Hsu for BETA and ALFA for rectangular and
square tied colum ns are 1.0 and 1.5 respectively. Bresler found that ALFA varied from 1.15 to 1.55 and
recom m ended that 1.5 be used for rectangular sections and that 1.75 be used for square sections. Furlong
recom m ended that ALFA be 2.0.

Axial Force M oment Interaction Diagram

129
25ee. Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 1) Yield Surface

PC PB M By M Bz PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


PB Axial com pression force at balance point ( < 0.0) F
M By Yield m om ent at P = PB about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
M Bz Yield m om ent at P = PB about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

Notes: 1. The yield m om ents are sym m etric in both flexural yield m om ent directions
i.e. M Yy+ = -M Yy- and M Yz+ = -M Yz-.
2. If M By or M Bz are zero then yield is suppressed in bending about that flexural axis. The yield
interaction below then operates only in the P, M y or P, M z plane.

130
25f. Reinforced Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 2, Type 3 and Type 4) Yield Torques and Interaction
Parameters
(Only if ITYPE =1 and JTYPE =3, 4 or 5, Two lines of data required 25f and 25ff)

FYy+ FYy- FYz+ FYz- TY+ TY- ALFA BETA

FYy+ Positive yield shear force in y direction ( $ 0.0) F


FYy- Negative yield shear force in y direction ( # 0.0) F
FYz+ Positive yield shear force in z direction ( $ 0.0) F
FYz- Negative yield shear force in z direction ( # 0.0) F
TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F
TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Interaction factor for the flexural term s in the y-y direction F
Note: ALFA = 0.0 or ALFA $1.0
BETA Interaction factor for the flexural term s in the z-z direction F
Note: BETA = 0.0 or BETA $ 1.0

Note: If both y and/or z yield shears and/or yield torques are zero then shear and/or torsional yield is
suppressed. Axial yield is autom atically suppressed in Beam -Colum n m em bers but the axial yield forces
are required to form the Axial Force - Mom ent yield interaction surface. Shear in the y and z directions
and torsion follow a bi-linear hysteresis rule.

If ALFA = 0.0 and BETA = 0.0 No M y - M z Interaction


If ALFA = 1.0 and BETA = 1.0 Linear M y - M z Interaction
If ALFA = 2.0 and BETA = 2.0 Elliptic M y - M z Interaction

The yield interaction surface (Penzien et al) is shown in the following figure where Pu is the current axial force in
the colum n and M yu and M zu are the current yield m om ents in the section.

Axial Force M oment Interaction Diagram

131
25ff. Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 2, Type 3 and Type 4) Yield Surface
(Only if ITYPE =1 and JTYPE =3, 4 or 5)

PC Pby M by PBz M bz M 0y M 0z PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


PBy Axial com pression force at balance point y-y axis ( < 0.0) F
M By Yield m om ent at P = PBy about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
PBz Axial com pression force at balance point z-z axis ( < 0.0) F
M Bz Yield m om ent at P = PBz about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
M 0y Yield m om ent at P = 0.0 about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
M 0z Yield m om ent at P = 0.0 about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

Notes: 1. The yield m om ents are sym m etric in both flexural yield m om ent directions
i.e. M Yy+ = -M Yy- and M Yz+ = -M Yz-.
2. If M Bz or M By are zero then yield is suppressed in bending about that flexural axis. The yield
interaction below then operates only in the P, M y or P, M z plane.

Note: In the Concrete Type 2 interaction diagram a single cubic function is passed through the four points with
axial forces and associated yield m om ents (P=Pc, M =0.0), (P=Pb, M =M b), (P=0.0,M =M 0) and (P=Pt,
M =0.0). The problem with this cubic function is that the m axim um yield m om ent is usually not at P=Pb
and it is often found that the cubic curve crosses the zero m om ent axis between Pb and Pc. If the colum n
design is such that the axial force usually lies between P = 0 and P = Pb this does not usually cause
difficulties. The user should use the program Surface (part of the Ruaum oko suite of program s) to check
out the form of the interaction surface.

In the Concrete Type 3 interaction diagram two separate cubic curves are used to represent the variation
of yield m om ent with axial force. In the region between P = Pb and P = Pc the cubic curve has a zero
gradient of m om ent with axial force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent is at Pb), has a yield m om ent = M b at
P = Pb, has zero m om ent at Pc and the function tends to a straight line as P tends to Pc. In the region
between Pb and Pt a different cubic polynom ial is used, again, the cubic curve has a zero gradient of
m om ent with axial force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent at Pb), has a yield m om ent = M b at P = Pb, has the
yield m om ent = M 0 at P = 0.0 and zero m om ent at P = Pt. There is a risk that, depending on the ratios
of M b/M 0 and Pb/Pt, that the cubic curve m ay intersect the zero m om ent axis between P = 0.0 and P =
Pt. The program will print out a warning with the listing of the section properties in the Ruaum oko3D
output file if this is likely. Again, the program Surface m ay be used to check out the form of the interaction
curves.

In the Concrete Type 4 interaction diagram a cubic curve and a quartic curve are used to represent the
variation of yield m om ent with axial force. In the region between P = Pb and P = Pc the cubic curve has
a zero gradient of m om ent with axial force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent at Pb), has a yield m om ent = M b
at P = Pb, has zero m om ent at Pc and the function tends to a straight line as P tends to Pc. In the region
between Pb and Pt a quartic polynom ial is used, again, the cubic has a zero gradient of m om ent with axial
force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent at Pb), has a yield m om ent = M b at P = Pb, has the yield m om ent =
M 0 at P = 0.0 and zero m om ent at P = Pt and the functions tends to a straight line as Pt is approached.
There is a risk that, depending on the ratios of M b/M 0 and Pb/Pt, that the quartic curve m ay an inflection
between P = 0.0 and P = Pt. The program will print out a warning with the listing of the section properties
in the Ruaum oko3D output file if this is likely. Again, the program Surface m ay be used to check out the
form of the interaction curves.

In general, it is recom m ended that the Concrete Type 4 interaction diagram be used and not the Concrete
Type 2 or Type 3 interaction diagram s.

132
If the colum n has only 4 reinforcing bars, one in each corner then the Axial Force - Yield Mom ent takes
a m ore diam ond shaped form with a peak in the yield m om ents at P = Pb and zero yield m om ents at Pb
and Pt. In this case it is probably better to use the Concrete Type 1 interaction curve with the value of
BETA = 1.0 or slightly greater. This is likely to be the case only for the analysis of older reinforced
concrete structures. In m odern structures such reinforcem ent details are unlikely to satisfy the concrete
confinem ent requirem ents of current design standards. If there is longitudinal reinforcem ent steel along
the faces of the colum ns as well as the corners then the yield m om ent interaction diagram is m ore
rounded near Pb and the Concrete Types 2, 3 and 4 interactions are m ore suitable shapes.

133
25g. Steel BEAM -COLUM N Yield Torques and Interaction Parameters
(Only if ITYPE =1 and JTYPE =6, Two lines of data required 25g and 25gg)

TY+ TY- ALFA BETA M U NU GAM M A

FYy+ Positive yield shear force in y direction ( $ 0.0) F


FYy- Negative yield shear force in y direction ( # 0.0) F
FYz+ Positive yield shear force in z direction ( $ 0.0) F
FYz- Negative yield shear force in z direction ( # 0.0) F
TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F
TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Interaction factor for the z-z axis yield m om ents then interaction equation F
Note 1.0 # ALFA
BETA Interaction factor for the axial force effect on z-z axis m om ents F
Note 0.0 is taken as infinity
MU Interaction factor for the y-y axis yield m om ents in the interaction equation F
Note 1.0 # M U
NU Interaction factor for the axial force effect on y-y axis m om ents F
Note 0.0 is taken as infinity
GAM M A Interaction factor for the axial term s in the interaction equation below. F
Note 1.0 # GAM M A

Note: If both y and/or z yield shears and/or yield torques are zero then shear and/or torsional yield is
suppressed. Axial yield is autom atically suppressed in Beam -Colum n m em bers but the axial yield forces
are required to form the Axial Force - Mom ent yield interaction surface. Shear in the y and z directions
and torsion follow a bi-linear hysteresis rule.

The yield interaction surface (Chen and Atsuta) is given by the following equation

where P y is PC when the axial force P is com pressive and equal PT when the axial force P is tensile. As
discussed by Chen for W ide Flange sections, where the y-y axis is the m ajor principal axis, M U m ay be taken as
1.0 and NU as infinity (i.e. in this program 0.0). This then sim plifies the interaction equation to

134
Interaction Diagram for Steel Beam-Columns

135
25gg. Steel BEAM -COLUM N Yield Surface
(Only if ITYPE =1 and JTYPE =6)

PC M Yy M yz PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


M Yy Yield m om ent about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
M Yz Yield m om ent about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

Notes: 1. The yield m om ents are sym m etric in both flexural yield m om ent directions
i.e. M Yy+ = -M Yy- and M Yz+ = -M Yz-.
2. If M By or M Bz are zero then yield is suppressed in bending about that flexural axis. The yield
interaction below then operates only in the P,M z or P,M y plane.

136
254h. Quadratic BEAM -COLUM N Yield Axial Forces and Yield Torques and Flexural Interaction
Parameter. (Only if ITYPE =1 and JTYPE =7, Two lines of data required 25h and 25hh)

PYT PYC FYy+ FYy- FYz+ FYz- TY+ TY- ALFA

PYT Axial force for tensile yield ( $ 0.0) F


PYC Axial force for com pression yield ( # 0.0) F
FYy+ Positive yield shear force in y direction ( $ 0.0) F
FYy- Negative yield shear force in y direction ( # 0.0) F
FYz+ Positive yield shear force in z direction ( $ 0.0) F
FYz- Negative yield shear force in z direction ( # 0.0) F
TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F
TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Flexural Interaction Factor assum ed to be the sam e for all flexural actions F
=0; There is no Interaction between flexural yield in the y-y and z-z axes
>1; There is an interaction between the flexural yield m om ents about the
y-y and z-z axes. This is independent of the axial force.
In this case 1.0 # ALFA # 2.0

Note: If both y and/or z yield shears and/or yield torques are zero then shear and/or torsional yield is
suppressed. Axial yield is autom atically suppressed in Beam -Colum n m em bers but the axial yield forces
are required to form the Axial Force - Mom ent yield interaction surface. Shear in the y and z directions
and torsion follow a bi-linear hysteresis rule.

The interaction surface between yield m om ent in the y-y and z-z axes when ALFA is greater than or equal to 1.0
is given by

where the interaction diagram is sym m etric about the m om ents (M Yy+ + M Yz-)/2.0, (M Yz+ + M Yz-)/2.0 and the
surface lim iting m om ents M Yy* and M Yz* are given by the yield m om ents in each direction about this centre
position. If P is com pression Py is PYC and if P is tension then Py is PYT.

If ALFA equals 2.0 the surface at any axial force is elliptical. If ALFA equals 0.0 the surface at any axial force is
a rectangle.

Flexural z-z and y-y interaction diagram .

137
25hh. Quadratic BEAM -COLUM N Yield Surface
(Only if ITYPE =1 and JTYPE =6)

PBy M By Pcy M Cy PBz M Bz PCz M Cz

PBy Axial force at B about y-y axis (PYT > PBy > PYC) F
M By Yield m om ent at B about y-yaxis ( > 0.0) F
PCy Axial force at C about y-y axis (PYT > PCy > PYC) F
M Cy Yield m om ent at C about y-y axis ( < 0.0) F
PBz Axial force at B about z-z axis (PYT > PBz > PYC) F
M Bz Yield m om ent at B about z-zaxis ( > 0.0) F
PCz Axial force at C about z-z axis (PYT > PCz > PYC) F
M Cz Yield m om ent at C about z-z axis ( < 0.0) F

138
25i. BEAM Yield Axial Forces and Yield Torques and Flexural Interaction Parameter
(Only if ITYPE = 3 and JTYPE = 1, Minim um of Two lines of data required, lines 25i and 25ii)

PYT PYC TY+ TY- ALFA IEND

PYT Axial force for tensile yield ( $ 0.0) F


PYC Axial force for com pression yield ( # 0.0) F
TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F
TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Flexural Interaction Factor assum ed to be the sam e for all flexural actions F
= 0; There is no Interaction between flexural yield in the z-z and y-y axes
> 1; There is an interaction between the flexural yield m om ents about the
z-z and y-y axes. This is independent of the axial force.
In this case 1.0 # ALFA # 2.0
IEND = 0; The flexural yield surface is the sam e at both ends of the m em ber I
= 1; Different yield surfaces are applicable at each end of the m em ber

Note: If both axial yield forces are zero then axial yield is suppressed and sim ilarly if both yield torques are zero
then torsion yield is suppressed. Both axial and torsional behaviour follows the bi-linear hysteresis rule.

The interaction surface between yield m om ent in the z-z and y-y axes when ALFA is greater than or equal to 1.0
is given by

where the interaction diagram is sym m etric about the m om ents (M yz+ + M Yz-)/2.0, (M Yy+ + M Yy-)/2.0 and the
surface lim iting m om ents M Yz* and M Yy* are given by the yield m om ents in each direction about this centre
position.

If ALFA equals 2.0 the surface is elliptical. If ALFA equals 0.0 the surface is a rectangle.

Flexural z-z and y-y interaction diagram.

139
25ii. BEAM Flexural Yield Conditions at End 1 of member (if IEND = 0 End 2 is the same)
(Only if ITYPE = 3 and JTYPE = 1)

M yz+ M yz- M yy+ M Yy-

M Yz+ Positive yield m om ent about z-z axis ( $ 0.0) F


M Yz- Negative yield m om ent about z-z axis ( # 0.0) F
M Yy+ Positive yield m om ent about y-y axis ( $ 0.0) F
M Yy- Negative yield m om ent about y-yaxis ( # 0.0) F

Note: If both positive and negative yield m om ents at a hinge are zero then yield at that hinge is suppressed.

25iii. BEAM Flexural Yield Conditions at End 2 of the member


(Only if ITYPE = 3 and JTYPE = 1 and IEND on line 25i is > 0)

M yz+ M yz- M yy+ M Yy-

M Yz+ Positive yield m om ent about z-z axis ( $ 0.0) F


M Yz- Negative yield m om ent about z-z axis ( # 0.0) F
M Yy+ Positive yield m om ent about y-y axis ( $ 0.0) F
M Yy- Negative yield m om ent about y-yaxis ( # 0.0) F

Note: If both positive and negative yield m om ents at a hinge are zero then yield at that hinge is suppressed.

140
25j. Reinforced Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 1) Yield Torques and Interaction Parameters
(Only if ITYPE = 3 and JTYPE = 2, Minim um of Two lines of data required, lines 25jand 25jj)

TY+ TY- ALFA BETA IEND

TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F


TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Interaction factor for the flexural term s in the interaction equation below F
Note 1.0 # ALFA # 2.0 usually 1.5
BETA Interaction factor for the axial term s in the interaction equation below F
Note 1.0 # BETA # 2.0
IEND = 0; The flexural yield surface is the sam e at both ends of the m em ber I
= 1; Different yield surfaces are applicable at each end of the m em ber

Note: If both yield torques are zero then torsional yield is suppressed. Axial yield is autom atically suppressed
in Beam -Colum n m em bers but the axial yield forces are required to form the Axial Force - Mom ent yield
interaction surface. Torsion follows a bi-linear hysteresis rule.

The yield interaction surface (Mirza et al) is given by the following equation

where Py is PC when the axial force P is less (m ore com pressive) than PB and equal PT when the axial force
P is greater (m ore tensile) than PB. The values recom m ended by Hsu for BETA and ALFA for rectangular and
square tied colum ns are 1.0 and 1.5 respectively. Bresler found that ALFA varied from 1.15 to 1.55 and
recom m ended that 1.5 be used for rectangular sections and that 1.75 be used for square sections. Furlong
recom m ended that ALFA be 2.0.

141
25jj. Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 1) Yield Surface at End 1 of member. If IEND = 0 End 2 also.
(Only if ITYPE = 3 and JTYPE = 2)

PC PB M Bz M By PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


PB Axial com pression force at balance point ( < 0.0) F
M Bz Yield m om ent at P = PB about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
M By Yield m om ent at P = PB about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

Notes: 1. The yield m om ents are sym m etric in both flexural yield m om ent directions
i.e. M Yz+ = -M Yz- and M Yy+ = -M Yy-.
2. If M Bz or M By are zero then yield is suppressed in bending about that flexural axis. The yield
interaction below then operates only in the P, M y or P, M z plane.

25jjj. Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 1) Yield Surface at End 2 of member.


(Only if ITYPE = 3 and JTYPE = 2 and IEND on line 25j > 0)

PC PB M Bz M By PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


PB Axial com pression force at balance point ( < 0.0) F
M Bz Yield m om ent at P = PB about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
M By Yield m om ent at P = PB about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

Notes: 1. The yield m om ents are sym m etric in both flexural yield m om ent directions
i.e. M Yz+ = -M Yz- and M Yy+ = -M Yy-.
2. If M Bz or M By are zero then yield is suppressed in bending about that flexural axis. The yield
interaction below then operates only in the P, M y or P, M z plane.

142
25k. Reinforced Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 2, Type 3 and Type 4) Yield Torques and Interaction
Parameters
(Only if ITYPE = 3 and JTYPE = 3, 4 or 5, Minim um of Two lines of data required, lines 25k5 and 25kk)

TY+ TY- ALFA BETA IEND

TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F


TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Interaction factor for the flexural term s in the z-z direction F
Note: ALFA = 0.0 or ALFA $1.0
BETA Interaction factor for the flexural term s in the y-y direction F
Note: BETA = 0.0 or BETA $ 1.0
IEND = 0; The flexural yield surface is the sam e at both ends of the m em ber I
= 1; Different yield surfaces are applicable at each end of the m em ber

Note: If both yield torques are zero then torsional yield is suppressed. Axial yield is autom atically suppressed
in the Beam -Colum n m em bers but the axial yield forces are required to form the Axial Force - Mom ent
yield interaction surface. Torsion follows a bi-linear hysteresis rule.
If ALFA = 0.0 and BETA = 0.0 No M z - M y Interaction
If ALFA = 1.0 and BETA = 1.0 Linear M z - M y Interaction
If ALFA = 2.0 and BETA = 2.0 Elliptic M z - M y Interaction

The yield interaction surface (Penzien et al) is shown in the following figure where Pu is the current axial force in
the colum n and M zu and M yu are the current yield m om ents in the section.

Axial Force M oment Interaction Diagram

143
25kk. Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 2, Type 3 and Type 4) Yield Surface at End 1 (and End 2) of
member
(Only if ITYPE = 3 and JTYPE = 3, 4 or 5)

PC PBz M Bz PBy M By M 0z M 0y PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


PBz Axial com pression force at balance point z-z axis ( < 0.0) F
M Bz Yield m om ent at P = PBz about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
PBy Axial com pression force at balance point y-y axis ( < 0.0) F
M By Yield m om ent at P = PBy about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
M 0z Yield m om ent at P = 0.0 about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
M 0y Yield m om ent at P = 0.0 about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

25kkk. Concrete BEAM -COLUM N (Type 2, Type 3 and Type 4) Yield Surface at End 2 of member
(Only if ITYPE = 3 and JTYPE = 3, 4 or 5 and IEND on line 25k > 0)

PC PBz M Bz PBy M By M 0z M 0y PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


PBz Axial com pression force at balance point z-z axis ( < 0.0) F
M Bz Yield m om ent at P = PBz about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
PBy Axial com pression force at balance point y-y axis ( < 0.0) F
M By Yield m om ent at P = PBy about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
M 0z Yield m om ent at P = 0.0 about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
M 0y Yield m om ent at P = 0.0 about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

Notes: 1. The yield m om ents are sym m etric in both flexural yield m om ent directions
i.e. M Yz+ = -M Yz- and M Yy+ = -M Yy-.
2. If M Bz or M By are zero then yield is suppressed in bending about that flexural axis. The yield
interaction below then operates only in the P, M y or P, M z plane.

Note: In the Concrete Type 2 interaction diagram a single cubic function is passed through the four points with
axial forces and associated yield m om ents (P=Pc, M =0.0), (P=Pb, M =M b), (P=0.0,M =M 0) and (P=Pt,
M =0.0). The problem with this cubic function is that the m axim um yield m om ent is usually not at P=Pb
and it is often found that the cubic curve crosses the zero m om ent axis between Pb and Pc. If the colum n
design is such that the axial force usually lies between P = 0 and P = Pb this does not usually cause
difficulties. The user should use the program Surface (part of the Ruaum oko suite of program s) to check
out the form of the interaction surface.

In the Concrete Type 3 interaction diagram two separate cubic curves are used to represent the variation
of yield m om ent with axial force. In the region between P = Pb and P = Pc the cubic curve has a zero
gradient of m om ent with axial force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent at Pb), has a yield m om ent = M b at P
= Pb, has zero m om ent at Pc and the function tends to a straight line as P tends to Pc. In the region
between Pb and Pt a different cubic polynom ial is used, again, the cubic curve has a zero gradient of
m om ent with axial force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent at Pb), has a yield m om ent = M b at P = Pb, has the
yield m om ent = M 0 at P = 0.0 and zero m om ent at P = Pt. There is a risk that, depending on the ratios
of M b/M 0 and Pb/Pt, that the cubic curve m ay intersect the zero m om ent axis between P = 0.0 and P =
Pt. The program will print out a warning with the listing of the section properties in the Ruaum oko3D
output file if this is likely. Again, the program Surface m ay be used to check out the form of the interaction
curves.

144
In the Concrete Type 4 interaction diagram a cubic curve and a quartic curve are used to represent the
variation of yield m om ent with axial force. In the region between P = Pb and P = Pc the cubic curve has
a zero gradient of m om ent with axial force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent at Pb), has a yield m om ent = M b
at P = Pb, has zero m om ent at Pc and the function tends to a straight line as P tends to Pc. In the region
between Pb and Pt a quartic polynom ial is used, again, the cubic has a zero gradient of m om ent with axial
force at Pb (i.e. m axim um m om ent at Pb), has a yield m om ent = M b at P = Pb, has the yield m om ent =
M 0 at P = 0.0 and zero m om ent at P = Pt and the functions tends to a straight line as Pt is approached.
There is a risk that, depending on the ratios of M b/M 0 and Pb/Pt, that the quartic curve m ay an inflection
between P = 0.0 and P = Pt. The program will print out a warning with the listing of the section properties
in the Ruaum oko3D output file if this is likely. Again, the program Surface m ay be used to check out the
form of the interaction curves.

In general, it is recom m ended that the Concrete Type 4 interaction diagram be used and not the Concrete
Types 2 or Type 3 interaction diagram s.

If the colum n has only 4 reinforcing bars, one in each corner then the Axial Force - Yield Mom ent takes
a m ore diam ond shaped form with a peak in the yield m om ents at P = Pb and zero yield m om ents at Pb
and Pt. In this case it is probably better to use the Concrete Type 1 interaction curve with the value of
BETA = 1.0 or slightly greater. This is likely to be the case only for the analysis of older reinforced
concrete structures. In m odern structures such reinforcem ent details are unlikely to satisfy the concrete
confinem ent requirem ents of current design standards. If there is longitudinal reinforcem ent steel along
the faces of the colum ns as well as the corners then the yield m om ent interaction diagram is m ore
rounded near Pb and the Concrete Types 2, 3 and 4 interactions are m ore suitable shapes.

145
25l. Steel BEAM -COLUM N Yield Torques and Interaction Parameters
(Only if ITYPE = 3 and JTYPE = 6, Minim um of Two lines of data required, lines 25l and 25ll)

TY+ TY- ALFA BETA M U NU GAM M A IEND

TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F


TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Interaction factor for the z-z axis yield m om ents then interaction equation F
Note 1.0 # ALFA
BETA Interaction factor for the axial force effect on z-z axis m om ents F
Note 0.0 is taken as infinity
MU Interaction factor for the y-y axis yield m om ents in the interaction equation F
Note 1.0 # M U
NU Interaction factor for the axial force effect on y-y axis m om ents F
Note 0.0 is taken as infinity
GAM M A Interaction factor for the axial term s in the interaction equation below. F
Note 1.0 # GAM M A
IEND = 0; The flexural yield surface is the sam e at both ends of the m em ber I
= 1; Different yield surfaces are applicable at each end of the m em ber

Note: If both yield torques are zero then torsional yield is suppressed. Axial yield is autom atically suppressed
in Beam -Colum n m em bers but the axial yield forces are required to form the Axial Force - Mom ent yield
interaction surface. Torsion follows a bi-linear hysteresis rule.

The yield interaction surface (Chen and Atsuta) is given by the following equation

where P y is PC when the axial force P is com pressive and equal PT when the axial force P is tensile. As
discussed by Chen for W ide Flange sections, where the z-z axis is the m ajor principal axis, M U m ay be taken as
1.0 and NU as infinity (i.e. in this program 0.0). This then sim plifies the interaction equation to

146
Interaction Diagram for Steel Beam-Columns

147
25ll. Steel BEAM -COLUM N Yield Surface at End 1 of member (if IEND = 0 Both Ends)
(Only if ITYPE = 3 and JTYPE = 6)

PC M Yz M Yy PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


M Yz Yield m om ent about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
M Yy Yield m om ent about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

25lll. Steel BEAM -COLUM N Yield Surface at End 2 of member


(Only if ITYPE = 3 and JTYPE = 6 and only if IEND on line 25l > 0)

PC M Yz M Yy PT

PC Axial com pression yield force ( < 0.0) F


M Yz Yield m om ent about z-z axis ( > 0.0) F
M Yy Yield m om ent about y-y axis ( > 0.0) F
PT Axial tension yield force ( > 0.0) F

Notes: 1. The yield m om ents are sym m etric in both flexural yield m om ent directions
i.e. M Yz+ = -M Yz- and M Yy+ = -M Yy-.
2. If M Bz or M By are zero then yield is suppressed in bending about that flexural axis. The yield
interaction below then operates only in the P,M y or P,M z plane.

148
25m. Quadratic BEAM -COLUM N Yield Axial Forces and Yield Torques and Flexural Interaction
Parameters
(Only if ITYPE = 3 and JTYPE = 7, Minim um of Two lines of data required, lines 25m and 25mm)

PYT PYC TY+ TY- ALFA IEND

PYT Axial force for tensile yield ( $ 0.0) F


PYC Axial force for com pression yield ( # 0.0) F
TY+ Positive yield torque ( $ 0.0) F
TY- Negative yield torque ( # 0.0) F
ALFA Flexural Interaction Factor assum ed to be the sam e for all flexural actions F
=0; There is no Interaction between flexural yield in the z-z and y-y axes
>1; There is an interaction between the flexural yield m om ents about the
z-z and y-y axes. This is independent of the axial force.
In this case 1.0 # ALFA # 2.0
IEND = 0; The flexural yield surface is the sam e at both ends of the m em ber I
= 1; Different yield surfaces are applicable at each end of the m em ber

Note: Axial yield is suppressed in beam -colum n m em bers. If both yield torques are zero then torsion yield is
suppressed. Torsion is assum ed to follow the bi-linear hysteresis rule. The axial yield forces are required
to define the flexural yield surfaces.

The interaction surface between yield m om ent in the z-z and y-y axes when ALFA is greater than or equal to 1.0
is given by

where the interaction diagram is sym m etric about the m om ents (M yz+ + M Yz-)/2.0, (M yy+ + M Yy-)/2.0 and the
surface lim iting m om ents M Yz* and M Yy* are given by the yield m om ents in each direction about this centre
position. If P is com pression Py is PYC and if P is tension then Py is PYT.

If ALFA equals 2.0 the surface at any axial force is elliptical. If ALFA equals 0.0 the surface at any axial force is
a rectangle.

Flexural z-z and y-y interaction diagram .

149
25mm. Quadratic BEAM -COLUM N Yield Surface at End 1 of member (if IEND = 0 End 2 also)
(Only if ITYPE = 3 and JTYPE = 7)

PBz M bz Pcz M Cz PBy M by PCy M Cy

PBz Axial force at B about z-z axis (PYT > PBz > PYC) F
M Bz Yield m om ent at B about z-zaxis ( > 0.0) F
PCz Axial force at C about z-z axis (PYT > PCz > PYC) F
M Cz Yield m om ent at C about z-z axis ( < 0.0) F
PBy Axial force at B about y-y axis (PYT > PBy > PYC) F
M By Yield m om ent at B about y-yaxis ( > 0.0) F
PCy Axial force at C about y-y axis (PYT > PCy > PYC) F
M Cy Yield m om ent at C about y-y axis ( < 0.0) F

25mmm. Quadratic BEAM -COLUM N Yield Surface at End 2 of member


(Only if ITYPE = 3 and JTYPE = 7 and IEND on line 25m > 0)

PBz M bz Pcz M Cz PBy M by PCy M Cy

PBz Axial force at B about z-z axis (PYT > PBz > PYC) F
M Bz Yield m om ent at B about z-zaxis ( > 0.0) F
PCz Axial force at C about z-z axis (PYT > PCz > PYC) F
M Cz Yield m om ent at C about z-z axis ( < 0.0) F
PBy Axial force at B about y-y axis (PYT > PBy > PYC) F
M By Yield m om ent at B about y-yaxis ( > 0.0) F
PCy Axial force at C about y-y axis (PYT > PCy > PYC) F
M Cy Yield m om ent at C about y-y axis ( < 0.0) F

150
25n. Hysteresis Data (Only if ITYPE = 1 or ITYPE = 3).

The num ber of sets of data required is equal the num ber of non-zero stiffness term s given in line 25a.

There are available up to 15 Hysteresis param eters available for each action (i.e. having a non-zero stiffness term )

The data is assum ed to be read from one line for each action

If a blank line is supplied, or the line contains the word Default, then the default response that there are no
hysteresis param eters for the hysteresis m odel.

Each param eter m ay be supplied as a number or in the form ‘label’ = number where Label is a character string
containing up to 24 alphanum eric characters. I.e
24.9 or Param eter1 = 24.9
If a label is not supplied then the output will pick default nam es such as ‘Loop Item Num ber xx’ where xx is the
item num ber in the range 1 to 15 else the label is used to describe that item .

151
26. LATTICE TRUSS element properties.

Lattice Truss Quadrilateral Element

Order of all of the com ponents required for Lattice Truss Elem ents.

1. Basic Section Param eters, see section 25a.


2. Truss Elastic Properties, see section 25b.
3. Truss Yield Properties, (as required) see section 25c.
4. Diagonal Truss Degradation Properties. (as required) see section 25d.
5. Plate Bending properties (as required) see section 25e
6. Truss Hysteretic Properties (as required) see section 25f.
7. Material Specific Dam ping, (as required) see section 25g.

26a. Basic element parameters

IH1 IH2 IH3 IDIAG IL1 IL2 IL3 W GT IDIST LOOP VEL ACC

IH1 = Hysteresis Rule for Truss Com ponents 1-3 and 2-4 I
IH2 = Hysteresis Rule for Truss Com ponents 1-2 and 4-3 I
IH3 = Hysteresis Rule for Truss Com ponents 1-4 and 2-3 I
IDIAG = 0; Norm al truss com ponents I
= 1; Diagonal trusses have a strength reduction based on the
tensile strain norm al to the direction of the truss com ponent
IL1 = Strength Degradation Rule for Truss Com ponents 1-3 and 2-4 I
IL2 = Strength Degradation Rule for Truss Com ponents 1-2 and 4-3 I
IL3 = Strength Degradation Rule for Truss Com ponents 1-4 and 2-3 I
W GT = W eight of the elem ent (25% to each of the four nodes) F
IDIST = 0; NO distributed Loads applied I
= 1; Distributed Loads Applied
LOOP = 0; Out-of-Plane failure effects not consiodered I
= 1; Out-of-Plane failure due to Norm al Velocity AND Norm al Acceleration
= 2; Out-of-Plane failure due to Norm al Velocity OR Norm al Acceleration
= 3; Out-of-Plane failure due to Norm al Velocity with Norm al Acceleration
VEL = Absolute norm al velocity to trigger failure (only if LOOP > 0) F
ACC = Absolute norm al acceleration to trigger failure (only if LOOP > 0) F

Notes:
1. IHi = 0 im plies elastic action
2. Any of the hysteresis rules for SPRING elem ents are able to be used for this elem ent
3. Any of the Strength Degradation rules allow for the hysteresis m odel m ay be used for the Truss
com ponents.
4. The elem ent weight is used to com pute the m em ber m ass and does not contribute to the static loads on
the m em ber or the structure.

152
5. These truss com ponents do not contribute to the rotational stiffness of the nodes and therefore care m ust
be given to the boundary conditions to avoid a singular stiffness of the structure. All four nodes m ust be
distinct (i.e. no triangles).
6. If the Out-of-Plane lim it velocity or acceleration are exceeded the diagonal truss elem ents are no longer
effective and their stiffnesses are set to zero.
7. LOOP=3. If f(abs(velocity)/VEL+abs(acceleration)/ACC > 1) out-of-plane failure is assum ed

26b. Basic Truss properties

K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6

K1 = Stiffness of Truss 1 (1-3 F


K2 = Stiffness of Truss 2 (2-4) F
K3 = Stiffness of Truss 3 (1-2) F
K4 = Stiffness of Truss 4 (4-3) F
K5 = Stiffness of Truss 5 (1-4) F
K6 = Stiffness of Truss 6 (2-3) F
R1 = Bi-linear factor (or Ram berg Osgood r) of Truss 1 (1-3) F
R2 = Bi-linear factor (or Ram berg Osgood r) of Truss 2 (2-4) F
R3 = Bi-linear factor (or Ram berg Osgood r) of Truss 3 (1-2) F
R4 = Bi-linear factor (or Ram berg Osgood r) of Truss 4 (4-3) F
R5 = Bi-linear factor (or Ram berg Osgood r) of Truss 5 (1-4) F
R6 = Bi-linear factor (or Ram berg Osgood r) of Truss 6 (2-3) F

Notes:
1. Ki = 0 im plies truss not present. At least one truss m em ber m ust exist.
2. Bi-linear factors only used for inelastic m em bers.

26c. Truss Yield Properties (only required if IH1, IH2 or IH3 greater than 0)

YP1 YN1 YP2 YN2 YP3 YN3 YP4 YN4 YP5 YN5 YP6 YN6

YP1 = Positive Yield Force of Truss 1 (1-3) F


YN1 = Negative Yield Force of Truss 1 (1-3) F
YP2 = Positive Yield Force of Truss 2 (2-4) F
YN2 = Negative Yield Force of Truss 2 (2-4) F
YP3 = Positive Yield Force of Truss 3 (1-2) F
YN3 = Negative Yield Force of Truss 3 (1-2) F
YP4 = Positive Yield Force of Truss 4 (4-3) F
YN4 = Negative Yield Force of Truss 4 (4-3) F
YP5 = Positive Yield Force of Truss 5 (1-4) F
YN5 = Negative Yield Force of Truss 5 (1-4) F
YP6 = Positive Yield Force of Truss 6 (2-3) F
YN6 = Negative Yield Force of Truss 6 (2-3) F

Notes:
1. If Ypi = 0.0 and Yni = 0.0 im plies truss i rem ains elastic.
2. If the truss m em ber does not exist supply 0.0 for both yield forces.

153
26d. Diagonal Truss Interaction (only required if IDIAG greater than 0)

P11 P21 P31 P41 P51 P12 P22 P32 P42 P52

P11 = Strength Change of Truss 1 (1-3) [0.40] F


P21 = Residual Strength of Truss 1 (1-3) [0.05] F
P31 = Strain at start reduction Truss 1 (1-3) [0.10] F
P41 = Strain at Change of Truss 1 (1-3) [0.50] F
P51 = Strain at Residual for Truss 1 (1-3) [1.00] F
P12 = Strength Change of Truss 2 (2-4) [0.40] F
P22 = Residual Strength of Truss 2 (2-4) [0.05] F
P32 = Strain at start reduction Truss 2 (2-4) [0.10] F
P42 = Strain at Change of Truss 2 (2-4) [0.50] F
P52 = Strain at Residual for Truss 2 (2-4) [1.00] F

Notes:
1. The values in the square brackets are the default values, obtained by supplying 0.0.
2. The sm allest value for the residual strength ratio is 0.01.
3. A blank line cannot be supplied for this data to get the default values, at least a line with one 0.0 is
required. Note, in Ruaum oko a blank line is ignored by the com m and processor.

26f. Strength Degradation and Stiffness Degradation data.


Up to 6 sets of data in order for truss com ponents 1 to 6
(Only required if the truss com ponent stiffness Ki > 0.0 and the IH or IL associated with the truss
com ponent is greater than 0 and if the hysteresis rule for that com ponent requires data. Note, even if IH
im plies no extra hysteresis data, if IL for that com ponent is >0 then the strength degradation data will be
required for the com ponent.)

154
26q. Quadrilateral Pressures (only if IDIST=1 on line 26a)

Px Py Pz IOP

Px Pressure in x direction (Force per unit area) F


Py Pressure in y direction (Force per unit area) F
Pz Pressure in y direction (Force per unit area) F
IOP = 0; Body Forces in local coordinate directions I
= 0; Body Forces in local coordinate directions

Notes: These pressures m ay represent actual pressures or else body forces such as gravitational forces acting
on elem ent. Body forces are m ore com m only acting in a global direction whereas pressures are usually
acting on the surface of the elem ent

26g. M aterial Specific Damping (only if ICTYPE = 5 or 7 on section 2)

This option allows different sections to have their own values of ALPHA and BETA for Rayleigh Dam ping. This is
useful if one is m odelling a pounding study between two adjoining buildings where the buildings have different
dam ping characteristics or where different parts of the system have different dam ping characteristics, i.e. in soil-
structure interaction studies. Dam ping m atrix C is given by

where M = Mass, = Initial Elastic Stiffness, = Current Tangent Stiffness.

BETA0 BETAT ALPHA

BETA0 Multiplier associated with Initial Stiffness F


BETAT Multiplier associated with Tangent Stiffness F
ALPHA Multiplier associated with Mass F

155
Note: These elem ents m ay be considered as a form of Lattice Analogy as described by Hrennikoff in his 1941
paper. The elem ents m ay be arranged to provide an analogy to a problem in plane stress or plane strain.
Assum ing that the elem ent is square of side a in plan and that the m aterial has a thickness of t then
Hrennikoff would suggest that that

If the forces in the m em bers are F i then the equivalent stresses, assum ing that the local x axis is
parallel to m em bers 3 and 4, m ay be obtained from

Reference: Hrennikoff, A.. “Solution of Problem s of Elasticity by the Fram ework Method”
Journal of Applied Mechanics, Vol. 8, No.4, 1941, pp169-175

156
27. Reinforced Concrete PLASTIC-HINGE spring type member properties
(note still under development)

Reinforced Concrete Plastic Hinge Spring M ember

There are two versions of the Reinforced Concrete Hinge m em ber, one for beam m em bers and one for wall
m em bers.

157
Beam Plastic Hinge (KOP=0)

Cross-Section of RC Column Hinge member

Cross-Section of RC W all Hinge member

158
Cross-Section of RC Beam Hinge member

159
The 80 individual springs, m aking up the Plastic Hinge m em ber have a sign convention where tensile
deform ations and forces are positive.

For Column Hinge members

Springs 1 to 36 represent the core concrete.


Springs 37 to 64 represent the cover concrete.
Springs 65 to 68 represent the corner longitudinal reinforcem ent.
Springs 69 to 72 represent the m id-side longitudinal reinforcem ent.
Springs 73 to 76 represent the diagonal shear stiffness in the x-y plane.
Springs 77 to 80 represent the diagonal shear stiffness in the x-z plane.

For W all Hinge members

Springs 1 to 32 and springs epresent the core concrete.


Springs 33 to 64 represent the cover concrete.
Springs 65 to 68 represent the corner longitudinal reinforcem ent.
Springs 69 to 72 represent the m id-side longitudinal reinforcem ent.
Springs 77 to 80 represent the diagonal shear stiffness in the x-y plane.

For Beam Hinge members

Springs 1 to 32 represent the core concrete.


Springs 33 to 60 represent the cover concrete.
Springs 61 to 72 represent the corner longitudinal reinforcem ent. .
Springs 73 to 76 represent the diagonal shear stiffness in the x-y plane.
Springs 77 to 80 represent the diagonal shear stiffness in the x-z plane

The core and cover concrete have different property sets, the steel has a property set and the diagonal struts
have their own property sets.

Plastic Hinge member Sign Convention

The sign convention for the individual springs is tensile strains and stresses are positive.

160
27a Control Parameters.

IPLAS B D COVER HL W GT ISTEEL ICONC INTG KOP SL IO Y0 Z0

IPLAS =0 Mem ber linear I


=1 Mem ber non-linear
B W idth of Cross-section F
D Depth (Height) of Cross-section F
COVER Cover to reinforcing steel centre-line from top or bottom of section F
HL Plastic Hinge Length F
W GT W eight of Com pound-Spring m em ber F
ISTEEL =0 Dhakal Steel hysteresis I
=1 Dodd-Restrepo Steel hysteresis
=2 Elasto-Plastic Steel hysteresis
ICONC =0 Brian Peng Concrete hysteresis I
=1 Crisafulli Concrete hysteresis
KOP =0 Colum n Hinge m em ber I
=1 W all Hinge m em ber
=2 Beam Hinge m em ber
INTG =0 Sim ple Sum m ation for Concrete I
=1 Trapezoidal Rule for Concrete
=2 Gaussian Quadrature for Concrete
=3 Lobatto Quadrature for Concrete
SL Shift of position of Transverse springs. (-0.5 # SL # 0.5)) F
(0.0 im plies that the Transverse springs are located m idway between Nodes K and L
where SL = -0.5 m oves springs to Node K and +0.5 m oves springs to Node L)
If m odel has gap then tension gap=HS and com pression gap=0.0
IO =0 Individual springs have output to the post-processor file I
=1 Indivdual spring output to post-processor file suppressed
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F

Note: IPLAS is usually going to be 1 but this gives the ability for the m em ber data for a non-linear m em ber to
be input but then the action is reset to linear.

27b. Concrete M aterial Properties.

EC FPC FT ECC FPCC FTC

EC Initial Elastic Modulus of Confined Concrete F


FPC Com pressive Strength of Confined Concrete (stress units) F
FT Tensile Strength of Confined Concrete (stress units) F
ECC Initial Elastic Modulus of Cover Concrete F
FPCC Com pressive Strength of Cover Concrete (stress units) F
FTC Tensile Strength of Cover Concrete (stress units) F

161
27c. Steel M aterial Properties.

ES FSC FST Slong R

ES Initial Elastic Modulus of Reinforcing Steel F


FSC Com pressive Strength of Reinforcing Steel (stress units) F
FST Tensile Strength of Reinforcing Steel (stress units) F
Slong Effective length of steel bars (default SL equals hinge length HL) F
R Bi-linear Factor (not used for Dodd-Restrepo Hysteresis) F

27d. Beam Steel Cross-sectional Areas. (KOP=0)

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

A1 Cross-sectional area of top right reinforcing steel F


A2 Cross-sectional area of top left reinforcing steel F
A3 Cross-sectional area of bottom left reinforcing steel F
A4 Cross-sectional area of bottom right reinforcing steel F
A5 Cross-sectional area of top centre reinforcing steel F
A6 Cross-sectional area of left centre reinforcing steel F
A7 Cross-sectional area of bottom centre reinforcing steel F
A8 Cross-sectional area of right centre reinforcing steel F

Note: Any steel area m ay be zero.


Springs 65 to 72 represents the reinforcing steel area A1 to A8.

27dd. W all Steel Cross-sectional Areas. (KOP=1)

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6

A1 Cross-sectional area of top right reinforcing steel F


A2 Cross-sectional area of top left reinforcing steel F
A3 Cross-sectional area of bottom left reinforcing steel F
A4 Cross-sectional area of bottom right reinforcing steel F
A5 Cross-sectional area of positive z face distributed reinforcing steel (total) F
A6 Cross-sectional area of negative z face distributed reinforcing steel (total) F
A7 Distance to centre of steel areas A1 and A2 from positive Y face (Default=COVER) F
A8 Distance to centre of steel areas A3 and A4 from negative Y face (Default=COVER) F

Note: Any steel area m ay be zero.


Springs 61 to 64 represents the reinforcing steel area A1 to A4.
Springs 65 to 70 represent A5 distributed, Springs 71 to 76 represent A6 distributed.

162
27ddd. Beam Steel Cross-sectional Areas. (KOP=2)

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 Gap_1-2 Gap_3-4

A1 Cross-sectional area of Layer 1 +Z reinforcing steel F


A2 Cross-sectional area of Layer 1 Centre reinforcing steel F
A3 Cross-sectional area of Layer 1 -Z reinforcing steel F
A4 Cross-sectional area of Layer 2 +Z reinforcing steel F
A5 Cross-sectional area of Layer 2 Centre reinforcing steel F
A6 Cross-sectional area of Layer 2-Z reinforcing steel F
A7 Cross-sectional area of Layer 3 +Z reinforcing steel F
A8 Cross-sectional area of Layer 3 Centre reinforcing steel F
A9 Cross-sectional area of Layer 3 -Z reinforcing steel F
A10 Cross-sectional area of Layer 4 +Z reinforcing steel F
A11 Cross-sectional area of Layer 4 Centre reinforcing steel F
A12 Cross-sectional area of Layer 4 -Z reinforcing steel F
Gap_1-2 Gap between layers 1 and 2 (Default=Cover) F
Gap_3-4 Gap between layers 3 and 4 (Default=Cover) F

Note: Any steel area m ay be zero.

163
27e. Column or Beam Diagonal Strut Concrete M aterial Properties. (KOP=0 or KOP = 2)

ECV FPCV FTV DBy Dbz FlexY FlexZ FlexT AngleY AngleZ

ECV Initial Elastic Modulus of Shear Concrete F


FPCV Com pressive Strength of Shear Concrete (stress units) F
FTV Tensile Strength of Shear Concrete (stress units) F
DBy Effective width of diagonal shear struts in x-y plane F
DBz Effective width of diagonal shear struts in x-z plane F
FlexY Flexibility factor in Y transverse direction (1.0 # FlexY # 3.0) F
FlexZ Flexibility factor in Z transverse direction (1.0 # FlexZ # 3.0) F
FlexT Flexibility factor in Torsional direction (1.0 # FlexT # 3.0) F
AngleY Shear Angle Y diagonal Struts (0.0=Geom etry defines) (0.0 or 20 # AngleY # 70) F
AngleZ Shear Angle Z diagonal Struts (0.0=Geom etry defines) (0.0 or 20 # AngleZ # 70) F

Note: Springs 73 to 80 represent the diagonal struts carrying the shear and torsion on the section.
The x-y plane struts have a cross-sectional area of B/2*DBy.
The x-z plane struts have a cross-sectional area of D/2*DBz
Struts 73 and 74 are on the + Z face of the hinge
Struts 75 and 76 are on the - Z face of the hinge
Struts 77 and 78 are on the + Y face of the hinge
Struts 79 and 80 are on the - Y face of the hinge

27ee. W all Diagonal Strut Concrete M aterial Properties. (KOP=1)

ECV FPCV FTV DBy AngleY FlexY FlexT

ECV Initial Elastic Modulus of Shear Concrete F


FPCV Com pressive Strength of Shear Concrete (stress units) F
FTV Tensile Strength of Shear Concrete (stress units) F
DBy Effective width of diagonal shear struts in x-y plane F
AngleY Shear Angle Y diagonal Struts (0.0=Geom etry defines) (0.0 or 20 # AngleY # 70) F
FlexY Flexibility factor in Y transverse direction (1.0 # FlexY # 3.0) F
FlexT Flexibility factor in Torsional direction (1.0 # FlexT # 3.0) F

Note: Springs 73 to 80 represent the diagonal struts carrying the shear and torsion on the section.
The x-y plane struts have a cross-sectional area of B/2*DBy.
Struts 77 and 78 are on the + Z face of the hinge
Struts 79 and 80 are on the - Z face of the hinge

Flexibility factor m ultiplies the flexibility in that direction by the factor to allow extra shear deform ation. The
stiffness of the diagonal struts are un-affected and the deform ation in the diagonal struts is the total shear
deform ation divided by the flexibility factor. The extra flexibility is obtained by added an additional spring in
series with the diagonal m em ber stiffness.

164
27f. M aterial Specific Damping (only if ICTYPE = 5 or 7 in section 2)

This option allows different sections to have their own values of ALPHA and BETA for Rayleigh Dam ping. This
is useful if one is m odelling a pounding study between two adjoining buildings where the buildings have
different dam ping characteristics or where different parts of the system have different dam ping characteristics,
i.e. in soil-structure interaction studies. Dam ping m atrix C is given by

where M = Mass, = Initial Elastic Stiffness, = Current Tangent Stiffness.

BETA0 BETAT ALPHA

BETA0 Multiplier associated with Initial Stiffness F


BETAT Multiplier associated with Tangent Stiffness F
ALPHA Multiplier associated with Mass F

27g. Hysteresis Rule Data for confined concrete (only if the hysteresis rule requires m ore data)
see Appendix B.

27h. Hysteresis Rule Data for cover concrete (only if the hysteresis rule requires m ore data)
see Appendix B.

27i. Hysteresis Rule Data for reinforcing steel (only if the hysteresis rule requires m ore data)
see Appendix B.

27j. Hysteresis Rule Data for shear concrete Y direction (only if the hysteresis rule requires m ore data)
see Appendix B.

27k. Hysteresis Rule Data for shear concrete Z direction (only if the hysteresis rule requires m ore data)
see Appendix B. And only if KOP=0

Note: Post-processor output is only provided for the following springs:-

Column Hinges.
The corners of the confined concrete (springs 1, 6,30,36).
The corners of the cover concrete (springs 37,38,39,40).
The four corner steel springs (springs 65,66,67,68).
The 8 diagonal struts (springs 73,74,75,76,77,78,79, 80).

W all Hinges.
The corners of the confined concrete (springs 1, 4,29,32).
The corners of the cover concrete (springs 33,34,35,36).
The four corner steel springs (springs 61,62,63,64).
The 4 diagonal struts (springs 77,78,79, 80).

Beam Hinges.
The corners of the confined concrete (springs 1, 4,29,32).
The corners of the cover concrete (springs 33,34,35,36).
The four corner steel springs (springs 61,63,70,72).
The 8 diagonal struts (springs 73,74,75,76,77,78,79, 80)

165
28. INERTIA (Relative M ass) type member properties

Inertia Mem ber

XM ASS YM ASS ZM ASS xM ASS yM ASS zM ASS SL Y0 Z0

XM ASS X - Longitudinal relative m ass F


YM ASS Y - Transverse relative m ass F
ZM ASS Z - Transverse relative m ass F
xM ASS X - Torsional Rotational relative m ass F
yM ASS Y - Transverse Rotational relative m ass F
zM ASS Z - Transverse Rotational relative m ass F
SL Shift of position of Transverse Dashpot. (-0.5 # SL # 0.5) F
(0.0 im plies that the Transverse m asses are located m idway between Nodes 3 and 4
where SL = -0.5 m oves m asses to Node 3 and +0.5 m oves m asses to Node 4)
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F

Notes:
1. Sign Conventions are the sam e as those for the SPRING m em ber types, see section 12.
2. If the length of a INERTIA type m em ber is zero then the local X, Y and Z axes coincide with the global
X, Y and Z axes.
3. The m em ber only acts during a tim e-history analysis and the m em ber inertia force or m om ent is
proportional to the relative acceleration or
relative rotational accelerations between the two
ends, nodes 3 and 4, of the m em ber.

M ember Sign Convention

166
29. TRIANGLE type member properties

Triangular Finite Element

Order of all of the com ponents required for Triangle Mem bers.

1 Basic Section Properties see section 28a.

29a. Basic section properties

ITYPE ISHEAR E NU THICK W GT IM EM B IM ATL IHYST ILOS IDIST

ITYPE = 0; Plane Stress and Plate Bending (Shell elem ent) I


= 1; Plane Stress only
= 2; Plane Strain only
= 3; Plate Bending only
ISHEAR = 0; Plate Shear Deform ation ignored I
E Elastic Modulus F
NU Poisson's Ratio F
THICK Thickness of the elem ent F
W GT W eight/(unit volum e) of the elem ent F
IM EM B = 0; Hybrid Stress Plane Elem ent and Hybrid Stress Plate Elem ent I
= 1; CST Plane Elem ent (6 degrees of freedom ) and Hybrid Stress Plate Elem ent
IM ATL = 0; Isotropic m aterial, uses E and NU above. I
= 1; Anisotropic m aterial, com pliance supplied
= 2; Anisotropic Com pliance, plane and plate properties differ.
IHYST = 0; Linear Elastic m aterial I
ILOS = 0; No strength degradation I
IDIST = 0; No distributed Body Forces or Pressures I
= 1; Distributed Body Forces and/or Pressures applied to elem ent

Notes:
1. The weight/(unit volum e) is used to com pute the m em ber m ass and does not contribute to the static loads
on the m em ber or the structure.
2. The elem ent is a Hybrid Stress Type 2 triangular finite elem ent. All three nodes m ust be distinct. The
stress distribution is assum ed to have a linear variation in both the x and y directions and the elem ent
edge displacem ents are assum ed to vary linearly along the elem ent edge for the tangential displacem ent
and to have a cubic variation along the edge for the norm al displacem ent. The elem ent actually assum es
a linear variation of thickness between nodes but in the application within the program a constant
thickness is assum ed.
3 The plate bending elem ent is a Hybrid Stress elem ent with a linear variation of bending m om ents in the
elem ent. The edge displacem ent have a cubic variation of plate displacem ent and a linear variation of
norm al slope along each edge.
4. The elem ent is assum ed, at present, to be linearly elastic.

167
In-Plane Force Sign Convention.

Plate Bending M oment Sign Convention

168
29b. Anisotropic M aterial (only if IM ATL = 1or 2 on section 19a)

If IM ATL = 1 then the com pliance m atrix [S] is used for both in-plane action and for plate bending.
If IM ATL = 2 then the com pliance m atrix [S] is used only for the in-plane actions

S11 S12 S22 S13 S23 S33

S11 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F


S12 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S22 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S13 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S23 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S33 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F

29c. Anisotropic M aterial (only if IM ATL = 2 on section 19a)

This com pliance m atrix [S] is used for the bending actions

S11 S12 S22 S13 S23 S33

S11 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F


S12 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S22 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S13 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S23 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F
S33 Com pliance term for com pliance m atrix F

29d. Triangle Body Forces and/or Pressures (only if IDIST=1 on line 29a)

Gx Gy Gz Px Py Pz IOP

Gx Body Force in x direction (Force per unit volum e) F


Gy Body Force in y direction (Force per unit volum e) F
Gz Body Force) in z direction (Force per unit volum e) F
Px Pressure in local x direction (Force per unit area) F
Py Pressure in local y direction (Force per unit area) F
Pz Pressure in local y direction (Force per unit area) F
IOP = 0; Body Forces in local coordinate directions I
= 0; Body Forces in local coordinate directions

Notes: Body forces are such as gravitational forces acting on elem ent and are m ore com m only acting in a global
direction whereas pressures are usually acting on the surface of the elem ent

169
29e. M aterial Specific Damping (only if ICTYPE = 5 or 7on section 19a)

This option allows different sections to have their own values of ALPHA and BETA for Rayleigh Dam ping. This is
useful if one is m odelling a pounding study between two adjoining buildings where the buildings have different
dam ping characteristics or where different parts of the system have different dam ping characteristics, ie.e. in soil-
structure interaction studies. Dam ping m atrix C is given by

where M = Mass, = Initial Elastic Stiffness, = Current Tangent Stiffness.

BETA0 BETAT ALPHA

BETA0 Multiplier associated with Initial Stiffness F


BETAT Multiplier associated with Tangent Stiffness F
ALPHA Multiplier associated with Mass F

170
30. M ACRO-ELEM ENT non-linear foundation element property data
(note still under development)

M acroElement

M acroElement Actions and Sign Convention

171
Reference: Chatzigogos, C.T., Pecker, J. and Salençon, J. Macroelement modelling of shallow
Foundations. J. Soil Dynam ics and Earthquake Engineering 2008. 17pp.

This elem ent is designed to represent an individual footing for a structure or the whole foundation for a building.
The ground contact under the building is assum ed to be rough, i.e. it can transm it a shear but is a no-tension
surface.
The m aterial under the footing is assum ed to be a cohesive soil.

Structure of the M acroElement

Rheological M odel of M acroElement

172
30a Control Parameters.

IPLAS ISL DIAM QQM AX KNN KVV KM M PSI KSI PL_P1 PL_P2 W GT

IPLAS =0 Mem ber linear I


=1 Mem ber non-linear
ISL =0 Macro-elem ent footing at end K of m em ber I
=1 Macro-elem ent footing at end L of m em ber
DIAM Diam eter of footing F
QQM AX Maxim um Vertical Force Supported by footing F
KNN Elastic Vertical Stiffness of footing F
KVV Elastic Horizontal Stiffness of footing F
KM M Elastic Rocking Stiffness of footing F
PSI Param eter for definition of Bounding Surface for Horizontal forces F
KSI Param eter for definition of Bounding Surface for Mom ents F
PL_P1 Num erical param eter defining am plitude of plastic displacem ents in virgin loading F
PL_P2 Num erical param eter defining am plitude of plastic displacem ents in reloading F
W GT W eight of footing. F

Note: IPLAS is usually going to be 1 but this gives the ability for the m em ber data for a non-linear m em ber to
be input but then the action is reset to linear.

30b. Up-lift Control Parementers.

UP_ALPHA UP_BETA UP_GAM M A UP_DELTA UP_EPSILON UP_ZETA NON-ASS


TOPLING M IN_LAM BDA TENS FRICT M APP UPLIFT

UP_ALPHA Alpha [Default=6.0] F


UP_BETA Beta [Default=2.0] F
UP_GAM M A Gam m a [Default=2.0] F
UP_DELTA Delta [Default=2.0] F
UP_EPSILON Epsilon [Default=0.5] F
UP_ZETA Zeta [Default=0.2] F
NON-ASS Associative YES/NO [Default=YES] A
The Alternative is Non-Associative
TOPLING 2.0 = Strip Footing; 3.0 = Circular Footing [Default=2.0] F
M IN_LAM DA Initial Value for hysteresis control [Default=0.0] F
TENS YES = Tensorial Plastic Stiffness NO = Scalar` Plastic Stiffness [Default=YES] A
FRICT YES = Cohesive Model NO = Friction Mode. [Default=NO] A
M APP YES = Vertical Mapping. NO = Radial Mapping [Default=NO] A
UPLIFT YES = Figini Uplift Model. NO = Chatzgogos Model [Default=NO] A

Note: Any values greater than 0.0 replaces the default value.
IF ALL default values are to be selected respond with word DEFAULT (m inim um of D)

The default M in_Lambda should only be supplied if restarting an analysis following an earlier run where
it is desired to have the elem ent start at the final status from the earlier analysis. Ruaum oko outputs the
final value of M in-Lambda in a table following the ductilities/dam age indices tables. W hen the initial value
is 0.0 the m odel starts with M in_Lambda at 1.0e25 and it will reduce as the elem ent becom es inelastic

173
30c. Refined M odel Parementers. (Only if TENS=NO or FRICT=YES)

K_ALPHA K_BETA G_LAM G_CHI C_XI

K_ALPHA Shear Stiffness Shape Factor [if 0.0 im plies >= 1.0] F
K_BETA Mom ent Stiffness Shape Factor [if 0.0 im plies >= 1.0] F
G_LAM Plastic Surface Factor F
G-CHI Plastic Surface Factor F
C_XI Plastic Bounding Surface Factor F

Note: Any values greater than 0.0 replaces the default value.
K_Alfa and K_Beta only used for Non-Tensorial or Scalar Plastic Stiffness
G-Lam, G-Chi and G_Xi only used for Frictional Soil Model
If num bers not to be used supply 0.0

30d. M aterial Specific Damping (only if ICTYPE = 5 or 7 in section 2)

This option allows different sections to have their own values of ALPHA and BETA for Rayleigh Dam ping. This is
useful if one is m odelling a pounding study between two adjoining buildings where the buildings have different
dam ping characteristics or where different parts of the system have different dam ping characteristics, i.e. in soil-
structure interaction studies. Dam ping m atrix C is given by

where M = Mass, = Initial Elastic Stiffness, = Current Tangent Stiffness.

BETA0 BETAT ALPHA

BETA0 Multiplier associated with Initial Stiffness F


BETAT Multiplier associated with Tangent Stiffness F
ALPHA Multiplier associated with Mass F

NOTE: This elem ent is still under evaluation; In the current form ulation the tangent plasticity flexibility is non-
sym m etric. The program , at present, defaults to m aking the m atrix sym m etric by replacem ent the
appropriate off-diagonal term s the averages of those com puted from the form ulation. Testing, using the
non-sym m etric tangent flexibility m atrix, show that the differences in response are insignificant. However,
Ruaum oko, m odified to use the non-sym m etric m atrices, is very lim ited in both available dam ping m odels
and in structural size capabilities as well as being considerably slower. This lack of sym m etry in the
tangent plastic flexibility is not a practical option and work is proceeding to resolve these issues.

174
31. SLOTTED Reinforced Concrete Hinge member properties
(note still under development)

Reinforced Concrete Slotted Hinge M ember

The sign convention for the Slotted Hinge m em ber is the sam e as that for the SPRING m em ber.
The sign convention for the individual springs is, tensile strains and stresses, are positive.

175
31a Control Parameters.

IPLAS B DB D SL HL W GT JOP IHS IHB IO Y0 Z0

IPLAS =0 Mem ber linear I


=1 Mem ber non-linear
=2 Bi-linear with Gap Concrete Hysteresis
B W idth of Cross-section F
D Depth to slot from top of section F
DB Depth (Height) of Cross-section F
SL Shift of position of Transverse springs. (-0.5 # SL # 0.5)) F
(0.0 im plies that the Transverse springs are located m idway between Nodes K and L
where SL = -0.5 m oves springs to Node K and +0.5 m oves springs to Node L)
HL Plastic Hinge Length F
W GT W eight of Slotted Hinge m em ber F
JOP =0 Sim ple Sum m ation integration rule I
=1 Trapezoidal integration rule
=2 Gaussian Quadrature integration rule
=3 Lobatto Quadratureintegration rule
IHS =0 Dhakal Steel hysteresis I
=1 Dodd-Restrepo Steel hysteresis
=2 Bilinear Steel hysteresis
IHB =0 Dhakal Steel hysteresis I
=1 Dodd-Restrepo Spring hysteresis
=2 Ring-Spring Hysteresis
=3 Bi-linear Spring hysteresis
IO =0 Individual springs have output to the post-processor file I
=1 Indivdual spring output to post-processor file suppressed
YO Lateral Off-set in local Y direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F
ZO Lateral Off-set in local Z direction (only for non zero-length m em bers) F

Note: IPLAS is usually going to be 1 but this gives the ability for the m em ber data for a non-linear m em ber to
be input but then the action is reset to linear.

31b. Concrete M aterial Properties.

EC FPC FT

EC Initial Elastic Modulus of Concrete (stress units) F


FPC Com pressive Strength of Concrete (stress units) (stress units) F
FT Tensile Strength of Concrete (stress units) (stress units) F

176
31c. Steel M aterial Properties.

ES R FSC FST L1 L2 D1 D2

ES Initial Elastic Modulus of Reinforcing Steel (stress units) F


R Bi-linear Factor (not used for Dodd-Restrepo Hysteresis) F
FSC Com pressive Strength of Reinforcing Steel (stress units) (stress units) F
FST Tensile Strength of Reinforcing Steel (stress units) (stress units) F
L1 Effective length of upper steel bars (default L1 equals hinge length HL) F
L2 Effective length of lower steel bars (default L2 equals hinge length HL) F
D1 Depth from top of beam to upper layer of reinforcem ent F
D2 Depth from top of beam to lower layer of reinforcem ent F

31d. Hinge Low er Link M aterial Properties.

ES R FSC FST L3 L4 D3 D3

ES Initial Elastic Modulus of Hinge Links (stress units) F


R Bi-linear Factor (not used for Dodd-Restrepo Hysteresis) F
FSC Com pressive Strength of Hinge Link m aterial (stress units) F
FST Tensile Strength of Hinge Link m aterial (stress units) F
L3 Effective length of upper Hinge Link m aterial (default L3 equals hinge length HL) F
L4 Effective length of lower Hinge Link m aterial (default L3 equals hinge length HL) F
D3 Depth from top of beam to upper layer of Hinge Links F
D4 Depth from top of beam to lower layer of Hinge Links F

31e. Diagonal Steel Properties

ES R FSC FST LENGTH ANGLE

ES Initial Elastic Modulus of Diagonal Steel elem ents (stress units) F


R Bi-linear Factor (not used for Dodd-Restrepo Hysteresis) F
FSC Com pressive Strength of Diagonal Steel elem ents (stress units) F
FST Tensile Strength of Diagonal Steel elem ents (stress units) F
LENGTH Effective length of Diagonal Steel elem ents F
ANGLE Angle of Diagonal steel below horizontal (degrees) F
If bars angle down to +x side of hinge then ANGLE > 0
If bars angle down to +x side of hinge then ANGLE < 0
(30 <= Absolute(ANGLE) <= 90)
If bars at 90 degrees to axis, then pure shear action.

177
31f. Shear Concrete M aterial Properties. (Default is SINA hysteresis m odel)

G FY R ALPHA FCR FCC

G Elastic Shear Modulus of Concrete (stress units) F


FY Shear Strength of Concrete (stress units) (stress units) F
R Bi-linear Factor for Shear Concrete F
ALPHA Cracking to Yield Stiffness factor (0.0 or greater than R) F
If 0.0, then Z Shear uses Bi-linear Hysteresis
FCR Cracking strength as a proportion of FY F
FCC Crack Closing Strength as a proportion of FY F

Note: For SINA hysteresis BETA = ALPHA


For SINA hysteresis FCR- = -FCR
For Bi-linear hysteresis, ALPHA = FCR = FCC = 0.0

31g. Beam Steel Cross-sectional Areas. Upper layer of Steel

N1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5

N1 Num ber of bars in layer (0 to 5) I


A1 Bar Area 1 F
A2 Bar Area 2 F
A3 Bar Area 3 F
A4 Bar Area 4 F
A5 Bar Area 5 F
B1 Bar 1 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B2 Bar 2 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B3 Bar 3 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B4 Bar 4 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B5 Bar 5 Location from Centre-line of beam F

31h. Beam Steel Cross-sectional Areas. Low er layer of Steel

N1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5

N1 Num ber of bars in layer (0 to 5) I


A1 Bar Area 1 F
A2 Bar Area 2 F
A3 Bar Area 3 F
A4 Bar Area 4 F
A5 Bar Area 5 F
B1 Bar 1 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B2 Bar 2 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B3 Bar 3 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B4 Bar 4 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B5 Bar 5 Location from Centre-line of beam F

178
31i. Hinge Link Cross-sectional Areas. Upper layer of links

N1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5

N1 Num ber of Links in layer (0 to 5) I


A1 Unit Area 1 F
A2 Unit Area 2 F
A3 Unit Area 3 F
A4 Unit Area 4 F
A5 Unit Area 5 F
B1 Unit 1 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B2 Unit 2 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B3 Unit 3 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B4 Unit 4 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B5 Unit 5 Location from Centre-line of beam F

31j. Hinge Link Cross-sectional Areas. Low er layer of links

N1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5

N1 Num ber of Links in layer (0 to 5) I


A1 Unit Area 1 F
A2 Unit Area 2 F
A3 Unit Area 3 F
A4 Unit Area 4 F
A5 Unit Area 5 F
B1 Unit 1 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B2 Unit 2 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B3 Unit 3 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B4 Unit 4 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B5 Unit 5 Location from Centre-line of beam F

31k. Diagonal Shear Steel Cross-sectional Areas.

N1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5

N1 Num ber of diagonal bars. (0 to 5) I


A1 Bar Area 1 F
A2 Bar Area 2 F
A3 Bar Area 3 F
A4 Bar Area 4 F
A5 Bar Area 5 F
B1 Bar 1 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B2 Bar 2 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B3 Bar 3 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B4 Bar 4 Location from Centre-line of beam F
B5 Bar 5 Location from Centre-line of beam F

179
31l M aterial Specific Damping (only if ICTYPE = 5 or 7 in section 2)

This option allows different sections to have their own values of ALPHA and BETA for Rayleigh Dam ping. This is
useful if one is m odelling a pounding study between two adjoining buildings where the buildings have different
dam ping characteristics or where different parts of the system have different dam ping characteristics, i.e. in soil-
structure interaction studies. Dam ping m atrix C is given by

where M = Mass, = Initial Elastic Stiffness, = Current Tangent Stiffness.

BETA0 BETAT ALPHA

BETA0 Multiplier associated with Initial Stiffness F


BETAT Multiplier associated with Tangent Stiffness F
ALPHA Multiplier associated with Mass F

31m. Hysteresis Rule Data for concrete (only if the hysteresis rule requires m ore data)
see Appendix B.
Om it if Bi-linear with Gap Hysteresis is used as no extra data required.
The tensile strength is set to zero
The tensile gap is m ade large enough that tensile stresses`are avoided
The com pressive gap is set to zero

31n. Hysteresis Rule Data for Reinforcing steel (only if the hysteresis rule requires m ore data)
see Appendix B.
(Om it if Bi-linear hysteresis is used)

31o. Hysteresis Rule Data for Bottom Hinge Links (only if the hysteresis rule requires m ore data)
see Appendix B.
(Om it if Bi-linear hysteresis is used)

31p. Hysteresis Rule Data for Diagonal Steel (only if the hysteresis rule requires m ore data)
see Appendix B.
(Om it if Bi-linear hysteresis is used)

Note: Post-processor output is only provided for the following individual springs:

The corners of the confined concrete


The end bars of both layers of top reinforcing steel
The end units of both layers of bottom hinge links
The end bars of the diagonal shear steel.

180
32. Reinforced Concrete W ALL type member properties
(note still under development)

W all Element

Assumptions:

1. The elem ent has 24 displacem ent degrees of freedom , the 3 displacem ents and the 3 rotations at each
of the four corner nodes.
2. The elem ent is assum ed to be nearly rectangular. All the behavioural m odels assum e that the wall in
elevation is rectangular. A sim ple check is m ade at elem ent set-up to ensure that the elem ent is not too
far from rectangular. The local x axis (through Nodal Points I and J) is assum ed to be the horizontal axis
and that the lines though Nodal points I to L and thought J to K are vertical
3 There are ten concrete filam ents the D length of the elem ent. In the 2-D m odel of the section there are four
filam ents in the local z direction giving a total of 40 concrete filam ents. In the 1-D m odel of the section
there is only the one filam ent in the local x-direction so there is a total of 10 concrete filam ents.
4. In the 2-D m odel of the section there is a steel filam ent near each of the four corners of the section and
there are eight steel filam ents distributed along each of the +z and -z faces of the elem ent. This gives a
total of 20 steel filam ents. In the 1-D m odel of the section there is a steel filam ent near each end of the
section and there are eight steel filam ents distributed along each centre-line of the section. This gives a
total of 10 steel filam ents
4. There are two diagonal struts to carry the in-plane shear in the elem ent for Model 1 and 2 only (These
follow the concepts found in the Brian Peng Reinforced Concrete Hinge m odel). These struts interact with
the vertical displacem ents in the elem ent and also with the stretching of the elem ent in the local x-
direction.For the other m odels the shear is carried by the individual vertical concrete springs.
5. The out-of-plane shear is provided by a spring m odel, nom inally elastic but degrading with the degradation
of the in-plane shear springs.
7 The twisting m om ent (M-yy) is provided by a spring m odel, nom inally elastic but degrading with the
degradation of the in-plane shear springs.
8. There is a stretching of the elem ent, largely due to the x-direction restraint of the two diagonal shear struts.
This is evaluated at the four Gauss integration points.
9. There is a curvature of the elem ent due to the variation in the x-direction of the out-of-plane z
displacem ents of the elem ent. This is evaluated at the four Gauss integration points
10. The stresses in each of the vertical concrete and steel filam ents is assum ed to be constant over the height
of the elem ent.
11. The top and bottom surfaces (I-J and L-K) of the elem ent have a cubic variation of the y direction
displacem ent and a linear variation of x axis rotation along the edge
12. The I-L and J-K edges of the elem ent have a cubic variation of the x direction displacem ents and a linear
variation of the y direction rotation along the edge.
13. The displacem ents of the two diagonal struts (J-L and I-K) are given by the x and y displacem ents of the
corner nodes only.
14 There is a cubic variation of out-of-plane displacem ent assum ed in the x direction to give the out-of-plane
curvature.

181
15. The difference in the displacem ents along the I-L and J-K edges gives a uniform strain in the x-direction
at any height y in the elem ent. This gives the stretching strain in the elem ent.
16. The vertical, or y, force is the sum of the forces in the concrete and steel filam ents.
17. The bending m om ent of the wall about the local z axis is given by the forces in the concrete and steel
filam ents and their spacings along the x direction
18. The out-of-plane bending m om ent about the local x axis is also given by the forces in the concrete and
steel filam ents and their spacings along the z direction. If the 1-D section m odel is used then this m om ent
has a zero value and all filam ents are assum ed to be concentrated along the central surface of the
elem ent.

Output Actions.

There are 8 actions, 8 deform ations and 8 stiffness factrors as outputs for the wall, acting at the centre m id-height
of the wall elem ent: (Actions 3, 4, 5 and 7 are only available if plate bending is included in the 1-D m odel and only
4 and 7 are available if plate bending is included in the 2-D m odel))

1. Vertical Force in (F-y) direction as the sum of the forces in the concrete and steel springs
(This is constant over the height of the elem ent)
2. In-Plane Shear Force (F-x) from the horizontal com ponents of the force in the two diagonal shear springs.
(This is constant over the height of the elem ent)
3. Out-of-Plane Shear Force (F-z)
4. Torsion (twisting) m om ent (M-xy)
5. Out-of-plane bending m om ent (M-xx)
6. Local z-z m om ent obtained as the m om ent from the concrete and steel springs. (M-zz)
This is considered typical of the m om ent at m id-height of the elem ent
7. Bending m om ent out-of-plane about the vertical (the average of the bending m om ent (M-xx) at the four
integration points)
8. Local Stretching stress (the average of the stretching stress at the four integration points)

Note: Post-processor output is provided for the 8 actions, their 8 displacem ents and 8 stiffness factors described
above. The eccentricity in the I-J direction of the Vertical force acting on the wall section is also output.

Post-processor output is only provided for the following individual springs: (see IO on line 32a)
The two end filam ents of the concrete
The two end steel filam ents .
The two diagonal struts

182
32a. Basic section properties

IPLAS IHC IHS IHV IOP M ODEL ILOS IO B COVER W GT IDIST

IPLAS = 0 Elastic behaviour only I


= 1 In-elastic behaviour
IHC = 0 Bi-linear with Gap Concrete Hysteresis (IHYST= 5) (default) I
= 1 Brian Peng Concrete Hysteresis (IHYST=54)
= 2 Crisafulli Concrete Hysteresis (IHYST=33)
IHS = 0 Bi-linear Steel Hysteresis (IHYST= 2) (default) I
= 1 Rajesh Dhakal Steel Hysteresis (IHYST=53)
= 2 Dodd-Restrepo Steel Hysteresis (IHYST=39)
IHV = 0 Origin Centre Shear Hysteresis (IHYST= 7) (default) I
= 1 SINA Shear Hysteresis (IHYST= 8)
= 2 Brian Peng Concrete Hysteresis (IHYST=54)
= 3 Bi-Linear Hysteresis (IHYST= 2)
IOP = 1 Sim ple Sum m ation (Uniform Location and weighting of springs) I
= 2 Trapezoidal Integration (Location and weighting of springs)
= 3 Gaussian Quadrature (Location and weighting of springs)
= 4 Lobatto Quadrature (Location and weighting of springs)
M ODEL = 0; 1-Dim ensional m odel of horizontal wall section. Plate bending added I
(2 Diagonal Shear Struts)
= 1; 1-Dim ensional m odel of horizontal wall section. Plate bending om itted (2
(2 Diagonal Shear Struts)
= 2; 2-Dim ensional m odel of horizontal wall section.
(20 Horizontal Shear` Springs)
= 3; 1-Dim ensional m odel of horizontal wall section, Plate bending added
(10 Horizontal Shear` Springs)
= 4; 1-Dim ensional m odel of horizontal wall section, Plate bending om itted
(10 Horizontal Shear` Springs)
ILOS =0 No W all Vertical Steel Strength Degradation I
= 1 to 7 W all Vertical Steel Strength Degradation (see Appendix A)
=8 ASCE 41-06 Perform ance Based Design evaluation
=9 ASCE 41-13 Perform ance Based Design evaluation
IO =0 Individual springs have output to the post-processor file I
=1 Individual spring output to post-processor file suppressed
B Thickness of wall F
COVER Cover on wall faces, m easured to centreline of distributed wall face steel F
W GT W eight/(unit volum e) of the elem ent F
IDIST = 0; No Distributed Body Forces or Pressures I
= 1; Distributed Body Forces and/or Pressures acting on elem ent

Notes:
1. The weight/(unit volum e) is used to com pute the m em ber m ass and does not contribute to the static loads
on the m em ber or the structure. .
2. M ODEL = 0 has a quadrilateral plate bending elem ent set up in parallel to represent the out-of-plane
actions. See following page for m ore detail.
M ODEL = 1 uses the sam e m odel for the wall as M odel = 0 except that the out-of-plane stiffness is
om iited.
M ODEL = 2 Uses a sim ilar m odel to that of Model 3 except that the out-of-plane deform ation is m odelled
in a sim ilar way to that of the in-plane deform ation. This m odel has a total of 96 elem ents. See following
page for m ore detail.
M ODEL = 3 uses the sam e axial and flexural m odel as that of M odel=0 but the shear is m odelled by
horizontal shear springs, one associated with each vertical concete spring.
M ODEL = 3 uses the sam e axial and flexural m odel as that of M odel=3 but the shear is m odelled by
horizontal shear springs

183
3. If ILOS = 8 (ASCE 41-06 Perform ance Base Design evaluation) then strength degradation data is
generated by the program from the input selection of m em ber type and control param eters. The
equivalent ductilities for the strength degradion and the perform ance levels for the rotation about the local
z-z axis are com puted and then the flag is reset to ILOS = 7. The output file will list the ASCE-41 status
levels for the m em ber as part of the ASCE-41 listing for all m em bers undergoing the perform ance checks..
4. If ILOS = 9 (ASCE 41-13 Perform ance Base Design evaluation) then strength degradation data is
generated by the program from the input selection of m em ber type and control param eters. The
equivalent ductilities for the strength degradion and the perform ance levels for the rotation about the local
z-z axis are com puted and then the flag is reset to ILOS = 7. The output file will list the ASCE-41 status
levels for the m em ber as part of the ASCE-41 listing for all m em bers undergoing the perform ance checks..

184
\

M odels of w all horizontal Cross-Section

185
1-D cross section model.

This has a single row of 10 concrete filam ents arrange along the cross section using the chosen
distribution, filam ent 1 at end J and filam ent 10 at end I.
1.. For M op=0 there is a single steel spring at each end at a distance of INJ and INI from the ends of the
section, steel filam ent 1 and end J and filam ent 2 at end I.
The default length of ENDJ is 2*INJ and the default length ENDI is 2*INI.
There are 8 distributed steel springs arranged uniform ly over the length of the wall between ENDJ and
ENDI. These take an eight point Gauss quadrature.
All steel filam ents are arranged along the wall centreline.
2. For M op=1there is a single steel spring at each end at a distance of INJ and INI from the ends of the
section, steel filam ent 1 and end J and filam ent 6 at end I. There are two further steel springs distance
LS1 And LS2 respectively from end J and two further steel springs distance LS4 And LS3 respectively
from end I.
The default length of ENDJ is INJ+LS2 and the default length ENDI is INI+LS4.
There are 4 distributed steel springs arranged uniform ly over the length of the wall between ENDJ and
ENDI. These take an four point Gauss quadrature.
All steel filam ents are arranged along the wall centreline
5. For M odel=0 and M odel=1 there are two diagonal (Brian Peng) shear struts, num ber 1 from Nodes J to
L and num ber 2 from I to K.
6 For M odel=3 and M odel=4 there are 10 horizontal shear springs whose locations m atch those of the
vertical concrete springs. There is an optional interaction with the vertical concrete strains varying the
Shear Strength of the concrete.
7. There are four horizontal (I to J direction) concrete springs, using a four point Gauss quadrature in trhe
vertical direction, to m odel the stretching action in the wall concrete.
8. There are four horizontal (I to J direction) steel springs, using four point Gaussian distribution in the
vertical direction, to m odel the transverse steel (these m ay be m odified later to allow for yield).

Sign Conventions:
1. The sign convention for the individual springs is that tensile strains and stresses are positive.
2. The sign convention for the 8 wall actions is the sim ilar to that for the SPRING m em ber
3. The plate actions that are available in the 1-D wall section are sim ilar to those in the
QUADRILATERAL Elem ent

186
2-D cross section model. (Not im plem ented yet)

. This has a five rows of ten concrete filam ents arranged along the cross section using the chosen
distribution. The width-wise filam ents, use a five pointy Gauss quadrature, through the wall thickness,
filam ent 1 at end J and on the positive Z face and filam ent 50 at end I on the negative Z face.
1. For M op=0 there are two steel springs at each end at distance of INJ and INI from the ends J and I of the
section, steel filam ent 1 and end J and positive Z face, filam ent 2 at end J negative Z face, filam ent 3 at
end I negative Z face and filam ent 4 at end I positive Z face.
There are two sets, one on each face of the wall, of eight distributed steel springs arranged uniform ly over
the length of the wall from a distance of ENDJ (default=2*INJ) and ENDI (default=2*INI) from each end.
These use an eight point Gauss quadrature.
The cover on all steel from the wall faces is COVER.
3. For M op=1 there are six steel springs at each end at distance of INJ, IS! and IS2) from end J and INI, IS3
and IS4 from end I of the section, steel filam ent 1 at end J positive Z face, filam ent 12 at end J negative
Z face.
There are two sets, one on each face of the wall, of four distributed steel springs arranged uniform ly over
the length of the wall from a distance of ENDJ (default=INJ+IS2) and ENDI (default=INI+IS3) from each
end. These use an four point Gauss quadrature
4. There are 10 horizontal shear springs along the section acting in both in-plane and out-of-plane directions
giving a total of 20 springs.
The springs are distributed in the sam e locations as the longitudinal distribution of the central concrete
springs. These shear springs m ay have an optional interaction with the vertical concrete strain allowing for
a reduction in shear strength due to vertical tension.
5. The stretching of the concrete in the horizontal (I to J) direction is represented by a four point Gaussian
quadrature in the vertical direction and a two point Gaussian quadrature through the thickness, i.e. eight
com ponents..
6. There is a four point Gaussian distribution in the vertical direction for each of the layers of the horizontal
or transverse steel on each of the wall faces, i.e. eight com ponents. (these m ay be m odified later to allow
for transverse steel yield).

Sign Conventions:
1. The sign convention for the individual springs is that tensile strains and stresses are positive.
2. The sign convention for the 8 wall actions is the sim ilar to that for the SPRING m em ber
.

187
2b. Concrete M aterial Properties.

EC FPC FT MU FPCC FTC ENDJ ENDI BJ BI

EC Initial Elastic Modulus of Concrete (stress units) F


FPC Com pressive Strength of Concrete (stress units) F
FT Tensile Strength of Concrete (stress units) F
MU Poisson’s Ratio of Concrete F
(Only used to com pute Shear m odulus G for out-of-plane shear and for torsion)
FPCC Com pressive Strength of Cover Concrete (Default = FPC) F
FTC Tensile Strength of Cover Concrete (Default = FT) F
ENDJ Confined concrete length (optional length of increased thickness) from Node J F
ENDI Confined concrete length (optional length of increased thickness) from Node I F
BJ W all thickness over length ENDJ at Node J (Default = B) F
BI W all thickness over length ENDI at Node I (Default = B) F

Notes: BJ and BI, if supplied, m ust be greater than B otherwise set to equal B
See notes on cross-section steel m odels for default lengths for ENDJ and ENDI is lengths are
not specified

32c. Steel Reinforcing M aterial Properties.

ES FSC FST Slong R INJ INI M OP

ES Initial Elastic Modulus of Reinforcing Steel (stress units) F


FSC Com pressive Strength of Reinforcing Steel (stress units) F
FST Tensile Strength of Reinforcing Steel (stress units) F
Slong Effective length of steel bars (default Slong equals W all Height H) F
R Bi-linear Factor (not used for Dodd-Restrepo Hysteresis) F
INJ Distance to centres of end steel areas from J end face (Default=COVER) F
INI Distance to centres of end steel areas from I end face (Default=COVER) F
M OP = 0; Default steel arrangem ent I
= 1; Triple End Steel and 4 distributed steel elem ents on each face

32d. W all Steel Cross-sectional Areas. (M OP=0 and default 1-D or 2-D section)

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

A1 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (node I -z corner) F


A2 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (node I +z corner) F
A3 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (node J +z corner) F
A4 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (node J -z corner) F
A5 Cross-sectional area (total) of negative z face distributed reinforcing steel F
A6 Cross-sectional area (total) of positive z face distributed reinforcing steel F
A7 Cross-sectional area (total) of negative z face distributed horizontal reinforcing steel F
A8 Cross-sectional area (total) of positive z face distributed horizontal reinforcing steel F

Note: If M ODEL = 0 or 1 and M OD =0 then A1 and A2 are com bined as a single steel filam ent. Sim ilarly A3
and A4 are com bined. A5 and A6 are also treated as com bined and located along the wall centreline.

188
32dd. W all Steel Cross-sectional Areas. (M OP=1 and 1-D section)

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4

A1 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (node J outer) F


A2 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (node J m iddle) F
A3 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (node J inner) F
A4 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (node I inner) F
A5 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (node I m iddle) F
A6 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (node I outer) F
A7 Cross-sectional area (total) of vertical distributed reinforcing steel F
A8 Cross-sectional area (total) of horizontal distributed reinforcing steel F
LS1 Distance in from end J to steel centre of m iddle steel at end J F
LS2 Distance in from end J to steel centre of inner steel at end J F
LS3 Distance in from end I to steel centre of inner steel at end I F
LS4 Distance in from end I to steel centre of m iddle steel at end I F

32ddd. W all Steel Cross-sectional Areas. (M OP=1 and 2-D section i.e. M ODEL=2)

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12

A1 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (+z face node J outer) F


A2 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (-z face node J m iddle) F
A3 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (+z face node J m iddle) F
A4 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (-z face node J m iddle) F
A5 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (+z face node J inner) F
A6 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (-z face node J inner) F
A7 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (+z face node I inner) F
A8 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (-z face node I inner) F
A9 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (+z face node I m iddle) F
A10 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (-z face node I m iddle) F
A11 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (+z face node I outer) F
A12 Cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel (-z face node I outer) F

32dddd. W all Steel Cross-sectional Areas and locations (M OP=1 and 2-D section i.e. M ODEL=2)

A13 A14 A15 A16 LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4

A13 Cross-sectional area (total) of vertical distributed reinforcing steel (+z face) F
A14 Cross-sectional area (total) of vertical distributed reinforcing steel (-z face) F
A15 Cross-sectional area (total) of horizontal distributed reinforcing steel (+z face) F
A16 Cross-sectional area (total) of horizontal distributed reinforcing steel (-z face) F
LS1 Distance in from end J to steel centre of m iddle steel at end J F
LS2 Distance in from end J to steel centre of inner steel at end J F
LS3 Distance in from end I to steel centre of inner steel at end I F
LS4 Distance in from end I to steel centre of m iddle steel at end I F

189
32e1. W all Diagonal Strut Concrete M aterial Properties (Diagonal Shear Struts (M ODEL= 0 or 1)).

ECV FPCV FTV DB ANGLE FLEX VFLEX R

ECV Initial Elastic Modulus of Shear Concrete (stress units) F


FPCV Com pressive Strength of Shear Concrete (stress units) F
FTV Tensile Strength of Shear Concrete (stress units) F
DB Effective width of diagonal shear struts in x-y (wall) plane F
ANGLE Shear Angle diagonal Struts (0.0=Geom etry defines) (0.0 or 20 # ANGLE # 70) F
FLEX Shear Flexibility Factor in transverse direction (1.0 # FLEX # 3.0) F
VFLEX Shear `Stretch Interaction (0.0= Full, 1.0=None) (Default=0.0) F
R Bi-linear Factor (only required for som e hysteresis rules) F

Notes:

1. The Flexibility Factor m ultiplies the flexibility in the in-plane shear action by the factor to allow extra shear
deform ation. The stiffness of the diagonal struts are un-affected and the deform ation in the diagonal struts
is the total shear deform ation divided by the flexibility factor. The extra flexibility is obtained by added an
additional spring in series with the diagonal m em ber stiffness.
2. If the Bi-linear with Gap hysteresis is used for the concrete and diagonal shear struts the tensile strength
of the concrete is reset to 0.0 and the tensile gap is sufficiently large that the concrete will not act in tension.
The Com pressive Gap is taken as 0.0.
3. The shear strut angle is in degrees. The default value is given by the arctan of H/D

190
32e2 W all Diagonal Strut Concrete M aterial Properties (Horizontal Shear Springs (M ODEL=2,3 or 4)).

ECV FPCV FTV VLOS1 VLOS2 VRES R

ECV Initial Elastic Modulus of Shear Concrete (stress units) F


FPCV Com pressive Strength of Shear Concrete (stress units) F
FTV Tensile Strength of Shear Concrete (stress units) F
VLOS1 Vertical Strain at start of Shear Strength loss (VLOS1 $ 0.0) F
VLOS2 Vertical Strain at end of Shear Strength loss (VLOS2 > VLOS1) F
VRES Residual Shear Strength (1.0 $ FLEX $ 0.01) F
R Bi-linear Factor (only required for som e hysteresis rules) F

Notes:

1. There are ten shear springs across the wall section, in the sam e locations as the vertical concrete springs.
The Vertical Strain for the strength degradation is the strain in the m atching vertical concrete springs.
2. IF VLOS2 is less than VLOS1 or equal to 0.0 there is no shear strength degradation.

Shear Strength Vertical Strain Degradation

191
32f. W all Body Forces and/or Pressures. (Only if IDIST=1 on line 32a)

Gx Gy Gz Px Py Pz IOP

Gx Body Force in x direction (Force per unit volum e) F


Gy Body Force in y direction (Force per unit volum e) F
Gz Body Force in z direction (Force per unit volum e) F
Px Pressure in local x direction (Force per unit area) F
Py Pressure in local y direction (Force per unit area) F
Pz Pressure in local y direction (Force per unit area) F
IOP = 0; Body Forces in local coordinate directions I
= 1; Body Forces in global coordinate directions

Note: Body forces are such as gravitational forces acting on elem ent and are m ore com m only acting in a
global direction whereas pressures are usually acting on the surface of the elem ent
Local x is direction Node I to J
Local y is direction Node J to K
Local z is direction norm al to wall in perpendicular sense x cross y

32f. M aterial Specific Damping (only if ICTYPE = 5 or 7 in section 2)

This option allows different sections to have their own values of ALPHA and BETA for Rayleigh Dam ping. This is
useful if one is m odelling a pounding study between two adjoining buildings where the buildings have different
dam ping characteristics or where different parts of the system have different dam ping characteristics, ie.e. in soil-
structure interaction studies. Dam ping m atrix C is given by

where M = Mass, = Initial Elastic Stiffness, = Current Tangent Stiffness.

BETA0 BETAT ALPHA

BETA0 Multiplier associated with Initial Stiffness F


BETAT Multiplier associated with Tangent Stiffness F
ALPHA Multiplier associated with Mass F

192
32g. Strength Degradation Data (Only if ILOS on line 32a is non-zero).
The sam e data is used for all four in-elastic actions

If ILOS is between 1 and 7, see Appendix A

Else if ILOS=8 or ILOS=9 only then,

ASCE/SEI 41-06 and 41-13 Performance Based Design Checks.

IASCE DATA1 DATA2

Number denoting member type Parameters Table


IASCE =12; RC W all (confined ends) ((A-A’)fy-P)/Af’ c, V/Apf’ c 10-19 I
=13; RC W all (non-confined ends) ((A-A’)fy-P)/Af’ c, V/Apf’ c 10-19
DATA1 First param eter governing rotations and perform ance lim its from table F
DATA2 Second param eter governing rotations and perform ance lim its from table F

One line of data is required for the m om ent about the local z axis F6.

The first and second ASCE param eters are and

After the elem ent is set-up, the yield strengths and the in-plane rotation of the wall section at yield is established
and the strength degradation param eters to follow the rules of ASCE-41 are set up in term s of ductility and ILOS
is then internally reset to ILOS = 7.

The ductility at points C, D and E on the ASCE 41 strength reduction plot are output during the static analysis, or
if there are no static loads, during the first tim e-step in the tim e-history analysis.

At the end of the output file the ASCE-41 perform ance assessm ent output for the m em ber is provided

Note that ASCE 41-06 m akes a distinction between Prim ary am d Secondary m em bers. .ASCE 41-13 does not
m ake this distinction and the sam e lim its are used for both Prim ary and Secondary m em bers.

193
32h. Hysteresis Rule Data for Concrete (Om it if Bi-linear with Gap hysteresis)
see Appendix B.

32i. Hysteresis Rule Data for Cover Concrete (Om it if Bi-linear with Gap hysteresis or if
FPCC = FPC) see Appendix B.

32j. Hysteresis Rule Data for Reinforcing Steel (Om it if Bi-linear hysteresis)
see Appendix B.

32k. Hysteresis Rule Data for Shear Concrete (Om it if Origin Cenre hysteresis)
see Appendix B.

194
33. M ember Load Sets. (Only if Mem ber Loads Sets were indicated in the m em ber data)

This data set m ust follow the Mem ber Property Data Sets

These overwrite the initial loads that are part of the FRAM E or BEAM m em ber property data sets.

Load Data Set Flag.

M LOADS

M LOADS W ord M LOADS A

This is followed by one input line is required for each Load set. .See either lines 33a or 33b below

195
33a. Either

M ember Initial Fixed End Forces (only if ICOND = 1)

N ICOND M 1z M 2z V1z V2z M 1y M 2y V1y V2y AXIAL AXPS TORQUE IOP

N Mem ber load set I


ICOND =1 I
M 1z Fixed-end m om ent about z-z axis at End 1 F
M 2z Fixed-end m om ent about z-z axis at End 2 F
V1z Fixed-end shear force about z-z axis at End 1 F
V2z Fixed-end shear force about z-z axis at End 2 F
M 1z Fixed-end m om ent about y-y axis at End 1 F
M 2z Fixed-end m om ent about y-y axis at End 2 F
V1z Fixed-end shear force about y-y axis at End 1 F
V2z Fixed-end shear force about y-y axis at End 2 F
AXIAL Axial force applied to m em ber (0.5 to each end) F
AXPS Axial prestress in the m em ber F
TORQUE Torque applied to m em ber about x-x axis (0.5 to each end) F
IOP = 0; Prestress force is internal to the m em ber only (Default) I
= 1; Prestress force also acts on nodes at ends of the m em ber.

Note: The prestress force which is Tension positive affects only the internal m em ber axial force used
in the determ ination of yield states and has no effect on the static analysis of the structure.

Frame M ember Initial Fixed End Force Sign Convention

The Axial force applied to the m em ber is positive if it acts in the direction K to L and one half of this force
is applied to each of the nodes at the ends of the m em ber.
The Torque is positive if it applies a positive right-hand m om ent about the m em ber going from end K to
L and one half of this torque is applied to each of the nodes at each end of the m em ber.
Positive m em ber m om ents cause tensile stresses on the bottom (- y or - z) fibres and positive shear forces
act in the local y or z directions on the positive local x face of the beam section. Tensile axial forces are

196
positive. As an exam ple if a downward (- y) load is applied to the above m em ber M 1z, M 2z and V1z are
negative while V2z is positive.

33a Or

M ember Initial Distributed Loads (only if ICOND = 2)

N ICOND UDLx UDLy UDLz TORQUE AXPS IOP

N Load set Num ber . I


ICOND =2 . I
UDLx Distributed Load per unit length in the local x direction.
F
UDLy Distributed Load per unit length in the local y direction. F
UDLz Distributed Load per unit length in the local z direction. F
TORQUE Torque per unit length applied to m em ber about x-x axis F
AXPS Axial prestress in the m em ber F
IOP = 0; Prestress force is internal to the m em ber only (Default) I
= 1; Prestress force also acts on nodes at ends of the m em ber.

Note: The prestress force which is Tension positive affects only the internal m em ber axial force used
in the determ ination of yield states and has no effect on the static analysis of the structure.
The Axial force applied to the m em ber is positive if it acts in the direction K to L and one half of
this force is applied to each of the nodes at the ends of the m em ber.
The Torque is positive if it applies a positive right-hand m om ent about the m em ber going from end
K to L and one half of this torque is applied to each of the nodes at each end of the m em ber.

Frame M ember Force and M oment Sign Convention.

197
34 Lumped W eights at the nodes.

For any analysis except a static analysis this section of data M UST be supplied. If all the m ass (weight)
of the structure is supplied as m em ber weight then the W EIGHTS flag m ust be followed by two lines of
data in which only the node num bers need be supplied. This data should be supplied for node 1 and for
the last node in the m esh respectively.

W EIGHTS INTERP

W EIGHTS W ord W EIGHTS A


INTERP =0; Om itted Nodes have no point weight I
=1; Om itted Nodes have weight of First Node in sequence repeated.

One input line is required for each nodal point. However, if any nodal points are om itted and INTERP
above is non-zero, the om itted nodes will be assum ed to have the sam e weights as those of the nodal
point on the previous input line. The inform ation for the last nodal point should be supplied even if it has
zero m ass. The nodal point num bers m ust be provided in an ascending order. It m ust be noted that the
nodal weights and that the self-weight com puted from the m em ber weights are not added to the static load
analysis.

N Wx Wy Wz Mx My Mz

N Nodal point num ber I


Wx Lum ped nodal weight acting in the X direction F
Wy Lum ped nodal weight acting in the Y direction F
Wz Lum ped nodal weight acting in the Z direction F
Mx Lum ped nodal weight acting in rotation about X axis at the Node F
My Lum ped nodal weight acting in rotation about Y axis at the Node F
Mz Lum ped nodal weight acting in rotation about Z axis at the Node F

Note: If only a static analysis is to be carried out, then the nodal weights m ay be om itted. Sim ilarly the
weight m ay be provided by self-weight of the m em bers (see the section tables in part 13 of this
m anual). Note that these weights are converted to m asses internally within the program .

198
35 External (static) nodal loads

LOADS INTERP

One input line with the word LOADS starting in colum n 1

LOADS W ord LOADS A


INTERP =0; Om itted Nodes have no point weight I
=1; Om itted Nodes have load of the First Node in sequence repeated.

One input line is required for each nodal point. The inform ation for the last nodal point should be supplied
even if it is not loaded. The nodal point num bers m ust be provided in an ascending order. It m ust be
noted that the nodal forces are independent of the nodal weights and that a self weight will not be
com puted from the nodal m asses and added to the static analysis.

N Fx Fy Fz M x M y M z

N Nodal point num ber I


Fx Static load at node N in the X direction F
Fy Static load at node N in the Y direction F
Fz Static load at node N in the Z direction F
Mx Static m om ent at node N about the X axis F
My Static m om ent at node N about the Y axis F
Mz Static m om ent at node N about the Z axis F

The last node, even if unloaded m ust be supplied or else end this data with a line with the word END (case
insensitive)

199
36. Dynamic load patterns (Only if IPVERT is less than 0)

One set of data for each of the ( - IPVERT) shape patterns.

The load com ponents will be m ultiplied by the loading, or excitation, history (see section 37). The first
com ponent is m ultiplied by the first excitation history and the second com ponent by the second excitation
history etc. This enables a m axim um of four com ponent loading, a constant static com ponent and up to
three tim e-varying com ponents.

In the Adaptive Push-Over analysis (IPANAL = 6) or for the Cyclic Adaptive Push-Over analysis
((IPANAL = 7) the value of IPVERT is set to -1.

In the Adaptive Push-Over analysis (IPANAL = 6) the elastic displacem ent associated with this load is
designed to be reached in 1.0/Alpha of the num ber of tim e-steps prescribed in the input data. The loads
prescribed here will be m ultiplied by the factor Alpha*DT/TIM E for the first step and then the subsequent
steps will use the Modified Rayleigh m ethod to generate the following load increm ents. In these analyses
the displacem ent increm ent in all subsequent steps is sim ilar in size to that in the first increm ent. The
analysis will term inate when the capacity of the structure is reached or the displacem ent history is
com plete. The default value of Alpha is 2.0.

One input line with the word SHAPE starting in colum n 1

SHAPE ALPHA

ALPHA Multiplier of Shape vector. (Only if IPANAL = 6), (ALPHA > 2.0) F

One input line is required for each loaded nodal point. The last nodal point should be provided even if no
loads are applied to it or else supply a line with node num ber 0 which will term inate the input.

N Fx Fy Fz M x M y Mz

N Nodal point num ber I


Fx Load in the X direction F
Fy Load in the Y direction F
Fz Load in the Z direction F
Mx Mom ent in the èx direction F
My Mom ent in the èy direction F
Mz Mom ent in the èz direction F

The last node, even if unloaded m ust be supplied or else end this data with a line with the word END (case
insensitive)

If there are m ore than a single loading pattern repeat all of the above SHAPE data for each of the loading
-IPVERT patterns

200
37 M ultiple External (static) nodal loads (only if IPANAL=11),
One set for each IPVERT Load Cases

STATIC N INTERP IOP SCALE LABEL

One input line with the word STATIC starting in colum n 1

STATIC W ord STATIC A


N Load Case Num ber, Must m atch order of load cases I
IOP = 0 or NO ; This load case is treated as is. (If alphabertic m in first letter) I/A
= 1 or YES ; This load case has the Static loads supplied under LOADS added
INTERP =0; Om itted Nodes have no point weight I
=1; Om itted Nodes have load of the First Node in sequence repeated.
SCALE Load case m ultiplier. All iput for this load case is m ultiplied by SCALE F
Default value (if SCALE=0.0 or om itted) then SCALE = 1.0
LABEL Label to describe load case, m axim um 30 characters A
If contains blanks or com m as enclose in quotes “ ” or ‘ ’

One input line is required for each nodal point. The inform ation for the last nodal point should be supplied
even if it is not loaded. The nodal point num bers m ust be provided in an ascending order.

N Fx Fy Fz M x M y M z

N Nodal point num ber I


Fx Static load at node N in the X direction F
Fy Static load at node N in the Y direction F
Fz Static load at node N in the Z direction F
Mx Static m om ent at node N about the X axis F
My Static m om ent at node N about the Y axis F
Mz Static m om ent at node N about the Z axis F

The last node, even if unloaded m ust be supplied or else end this data with a line with the word END (case
insensitive)

There M UST be a com plete data set for each of the IPVERT load cases.

201
38 Earthquake Accelerograms, Displacement Time-Histories or Dynamic Load Time-Histories.
(Only for IPANAL = 2, 3, 4, 5, 8 or 9)

The following set of input lines is required for each earthquake or dynam ic loading com ponent.
There is 1 com ponent if IPVERT = -1, 0 or 1
There are n com ponents if IPVERT = -n or n

For Earthquake Accelerogram s the com ponents act in the directions specified in the Earthquake
Transform ation m atrix supplied in section 2b of this m anual.

For Dynam ic loading patterns each com ponent m ultiplies each of the load vectors described under the
SHAPE data sets.

For Input Displacem ent Histories (IPANAL = 8 or 9) the excitations act at the degrees of freedom specified
in the Nodal Point Boundary Condition data. The displacem ent m ust be scaled, via the divisor ASCALE
to have the displacem ent units chosen for the structure.

38a. Excitation Flag

One input line with the word EQUAKE starting in colum n 1

EQUAKE FILE

FILE Nam e of File where excitation is to be found (Maxim um of 60 characters) A


If less than 3 excitations this nam e is usually supplied in response to the
the prom pts when the program s starts, or in Batch m ode as argum ents
on the com m and line.
If a file nam e is supplied here it over-rides those supplied at the prom pts
or on the com m and line.
If no nam e is supplied then the excitation is assum ed to follow this line in
the supplied data. In this user m ay use word INPUT.
This nam e MUST be supplied after the third excitation if abs(IPVERT) > 3
unless the excitations are part of the input data file.

202
38b. Control parameters for Accelerogram, Displacement Time-History or Loading Time-History

IBERG ISTART DELTAT ASCALE END VEL DIS TSCALE

IBERG = 0; Excitation in BERG Form at I


= 1; Excitation in CALTECH Form at
= 2; Excitation in NCEER Form at
= 3; Excitation in FREE Form at (One point per line)
= 4; Excitation in CSMIP Form at
= 5; Excitation in EXCEL Form at
= 6, Excitation in PEER Form at
= 7; Excitation in SAC Form at
ISTART The num ber of the first line of the excitation that is to be used. I
This is usually = 1 but by using greater values enables the start of the
record to be ignored. The num ber of lines counts from the START line.
DELTAT Excitation data interval F
BERG Form at records = Tim e step at which the record will be digitized.
The default value is the tim e-step for the integration DT. This m ay
m ean large m em ory requirem ents for very sm all tim e-steps.
It is suggested that som ething of the order of 0.01 seconds be used
for m ost records is a larger interval is desired.
CALTECH Form at records the record tim e-interval
(usually 0.025, 0.02, 0.01 or 0.005 seconds)
NCEER Form at records the record tim e-interval
(usually 0.02 seconds)
FREE Form at records (see BERG Form at records)
CSMIP Form at records the record tim e-interval
(usually 0.02 seconds)
EXCEL Form at records (see BERG Form at records)
PEER Form at records the record tim e-interval
(usually 0.004 seconds)
SAC Form at records the record tim e-interval
(usually 0.020 seconds)
ASCALE 1/(Scale factor) for the record. F
BERG, FREE or EXCEL Form at records om it or set equal to 1.0
CALTECH records are usually in units of acceleration m ultiplied by a constant
as the F6.0 form at is usually an Integer I6 form at and the decim al point is
m issing with about 5 integer digits for the largest num bers. The values m ust
be converted units of the acceleration of gravity . If the record is in the units
of m m /sec/sec and if g = 9.81 m /sec/sec. then ASCALE = 9810.0.
NCEER and CSMIP records are usually in cm /sec/sec and ASCALE = 981.0
to bring the record to units of the acceleration of gravity.
END Determ ines action if End-of-File is found before spanning duration of F
excitation, DUR in line 3 of the data (Fram e Control Param eters).
=0 ; End of File im plies data error
= -1 ; Any m issing part of record is padded with zero values
= T ; After T seconds record is set to zero. Allows for a free vibration of
TIM E-T seconds at the end of the earthquake excitation.
VEL Initial Ground Velocity (Default = 0.0) F
Added to all degrees of freedom at beginning of Tim e-history analysis for
earthquake analysis only. Only im portant in travelling wave analyses or where
total instead of relative displacem ents are being used
DIS Initial Ground Displacem ent (Default = 0.0) F
Added to all degrees of freedom at beginning of Tim e-history analysis for
earthquake analysis only. (Not norm ally of any im portance to the analysis)
TSCALE Tim e scale for the record (Default = 1.0) F
The tim es im plied in the record are effectively divided by TSCALE. If
TSCALE = 2.0 then if the duration of the analysis is 10 seconds at least
20 seconds of excitation m ust be provided unless END = -1

203
The rest of the input for the accelerogram (section 37c and 37d) is in the Accelerogram File, the
Displacem ent History File or the Force History File specified by the user in the initial file nam e prom pts at
the beginning of the program execution or on the line with the word EQUAKE. The default response is that
the accelerogram s, or excitation is appended to the above data file.

38c. Accelerogram, Displacement History or Load-History flag. This line is the start of the
accelerogram etc. for all but the PEER or SAC form at records.

The PEER form at records are preceded by 4 lines of header inform ation and this START line is not used.
The SAC form at records are preceded by 2 lines of header inform ation and this START line is not used.

One input line with the word STAR, START or DATA: (the colon is m andatory) starting in colum n 1 and
the word must be in upper case. This line m ay be preceded by as m any header lines as desired.

START

38d. Accelerogram, Displacement History or Load-History

The rem ainder of the input is the Acceleration, Displacem ent History or Load-history record itself. The
record is in the form of a series of lines each of which starts with a Line Sequence Number (which m ust
be in an ascending order) followed by either (i) a group of 4 or 1 successive tim e-acceleration points (BERG
or FREE or EXCEL Form ats), or (ii) a sequence of 10, 8, 5 or 6 uniform ly spaced acceleration values at
DELTAT tim e intervals apart, the (CALTECH, NCEER , CSMIP, PEER or SAC Form ats).

Note that the NCEER, CSMIP, EXCEL, PEER or SAC records do not have a sequence num ber. The
analysis acceleration record, or forcing function, will begin at the first tim e on or im plied by the beginning
of the accelerogram line ISTART and there must be sufficient lines rem aining to span the analysis tim e-
history length TR.

If the input is a force history IPVERT < 0 then the so-called accelerations are the actual force m ultiplier
values which will m ultiply the input load shape patterns (see section 32 above).

If the input are Displacem ent Histories (IPANAL = 8) these histories are applied to the degrees of freedom
specified in the Nodal Point Boundary Conditions.

The record m ust be on one of the following form ats depending on the value of IBERG on section 33b. The
FORTRAN form at is provided in parentheses for each case.

The I3 form at im plies 3 characters for the num ber which is right justified, 6X im plies 6 blank characters.
The F8.4 im plies 8 characters for the num ber and if om itted the decim al point is located in front of the 4 th
to last character in the 8 character set which is assum e to be right justified, if the decim al point is provided
the num ber m ay be located anywhere in the 8 character space. A num ber preceding the form at, i.e. 10F8.4
m eans that there are 10 num bers each having an 8 character field. Each form at starts on a new line.

204
(1) BERG FORMAT (I3,4(F8.4,F9.6)) (Default filenam e extension is .eqb)

ISEQ T1 G1 T2 G2 T3 G3 T4 G4

ISEQ Line sequence num ber I3


Ti Tim e of point on accelerogram (seconds) F 8.4
Gi Acceleration (decim al fraction of gravity) F 9.6

If the line sequence num ber is greater than 999 it is not read or checked by the program .

(2) CALTECH FORMAT (I4,6X,10F6.0) or m ore precisely (I4,6X,10I6)(Default filenam e extension


is .eqc)

ISEQ G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10

ISEQ Line sequence num ber I4


Gi 10 Accelerations (m ultiplied by ASCALE) at intervals of DELTAT I6

If the line sequence num ber is greater than 9999 it is not read or checked by the program .

(3) NCEER FORMAT (10F8.2) (Default filenam e extension is .eqn)

G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10

Gi Acceleration (m ultiplied by ASCALE) at intervals of DELTAT F 8.2

(4) FREE FORMAT (*) (Default filenam e extension is .eqf)

ISEQ T1 G1

ISEQ Line sequence num ber I


T1 Tim e of point on accelerogram (seconds) F
G1 Acceleration (decim al fraction of gravity) F

The three item s m ay be placed anywhere on the line and separated by at least one blank colum n or a
com m a. The lines m ust be in consecutive order with ISEQ starting at 1 and increasing line by line. This
form at is particularly useful where the excitation record has been generated on a spreadsheet. It is,
however, not as com pact a form at as the NCEER form at.

205
(5) CSM IP FORMAT (8F10.3) (Default filenam e extension is .eqs)

G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8

Gi 8 Accelerations (m ultiplied by ASCALE) at intervals of DELTAT F10.3

(6) EXCEL FORMAT ( * ) (Default filenam e extension is .eqe)

T1 G1

T1 Tim e of point on accelerogram (seconds) F


G1 Acceleration (decim al fraction of gravity) F

The two item s m ay be placed anywhere on the line and separated by at least one blank colum n or a
com m a. The tim es MUST be in ascending order but do not have to be at equal intervals. This form at is
particularly useful where the excitation record has been generated on a spreadsheet. It is, however, not
as com pact a form at as the NCEER form at.

(7) PEER FORMAT (5E15.7) (Default filenam e extension is .eqp)

G1 G2 G3 G4 G5

Gi Acceleration (m ultiplied by ASCALE) at intervals of DELTAT E15.7

Note DELTAT is usually 0.004 seconds. The records are usually in the units of the acceleration of gravity.

(8) SAC FORMAT (6E13.5) (Default filenam e extension is .eqk)

G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6

Gi Acceleration (m ultiplied by ASCALE) at intervals of DELTAT E13.5

Note DELTAT is usually 0.020 seconds. The records are usually in the units of the acceleration of gravity.

206
39. Cyclic Adaptive Push-Over Displacement Time-History. (Only for IPANAL = 7)

The following set of input lines is required for the required displacem ent history. This displacem ent history
acts as a control on the displacem ent at the node and direction specified on line 34b.

39a. Excitation Flag

One input line with the word EQUAKE starting in colum n 1

EQUAKE FILE

FILE Nam e of File where excitation is to be found (Maxim um of 60 characters) A


If less than 3 excitations this nam e is usually supplied in response to the
the prom pts when the program s starts, or in Batch m ode as argum ents
on the com m and line.
If a file nam e is supplied here it over-rides those supplied at the prom pts
or on the com m and line.
If no nam e is supplied then the excitation is assum ed to follow this line in
the supplied data. In this user m ay use word INPUT.

39b. Control parameters for Displacement History.

NSTEP NODE NDOF SCALE IPRINT

NSTEP Num ber of Points in Displacem ent History I


NODE Nodal Point where Displacem ent History is Measured. I
NDOF Direction in which Displacem ent History is Measured. A
If the displacem ent is m easured in the global X direction use X, x or 1
If the displacem ent is m easured in the global Y direction use Y, y or 2
If the displacem ent is m easured in the global Z direction use Z, z or 3
SCALE Scale factor for the record. (Default value is 1.0) F
IPRINT = 0; Displacem ent History is not printed in output file. I
= 1; Displacem ent History is printed in output file.

207
The rest of the input for the displacem ent history (section 34c and 34d) is in the Displacem ent-History File
the nam e of which is specified by the user in the initial acceleration file nam e prom pts at the beginning of
the program execution. The default response is that the displacem ent history, or excitation, is appended
to the above data file.

39c. Displacement History flag

One input line with the word STAR, START or DATA: (the colon is m andatory) starting in colum n 1 and
the word must be in upper case. This line m ay be preceded by as m any header lines as desired.

START

39d. Displacement History

The rem ainder of the input is the Displacem ent History record itself. The record is in the form of a series
of lines each of which contains a sequence of displacem ents at which the Adaptive Load Sequence
reverses. Each of these values is read under the FO RTRAN Free Form at so that the num bers are
separated by one or m ore blanks or a com m a. All NSTEP points MUST be supplied. The initial 0.0 is
im plied and should not be supplied. The sequence of displacem ent values should have alternating signs.
Use as m any lines as are necessary to span all NSTEP points.

D1 D2 D3 .. ... Di ... .. Dnstep

Di = The ith displacem ent in the Displacem ent History. *

208
40 Acceleration Response Spectra. (Only if IPANAL =10)

The following set of input lines is required for the acceleration response spectra. These spectral
accelerations are assum ed to apply to the base of the structure and will apply to all earthquake excitation
directions as specified by the param eter IPVERT in line 2 of the data set. The orientation of the
earthquake com ponents corresponds to the Earthquake Excitation Com ponent Transform ation given in
data line 3 of the input data.

40a. Spectra Flag

One input line with the word SPECTRA starting in colum n 1

SPECTRA FILE

FILE Nam e of File where excitation is to be found (Maxim um of 60 characters) A


This nam e is usually supplied in response to the prom pts when the
program s starts, or in Batch m ode as argum ents on the com m and line.
If a file nam e is supplied here it over-rides those supplied at the prom pts
or on the com m and line.
If no file nam e is supplied then the excitation is assum ed to follow line 39b in
the supplied data. .

40b. Control parameters for the Response Spectra.

NSTEP IPRINT ISAM E ICOM B SDAM P SW HITE

NSTEP Num ber of Points in Acceleration Response Spectra. I


IPRINT = 0; Response Spectra is not printed in output file. I
= 1; Response Spectra is printed in output file.
ISAM E = 0; All IPVERT earthquake com ponents use the sam e response spectra. I
= 1; IPVERT response spectra are supplied.
ICOM B = 0; SRSS m odal com binations are used. (Default) I
= 1; CQC m odal com binations are used .
= 2; DSC m odal com binations are used
= 3; Humar m odal com binations are used
= 4: Gupta m odal com bination are used
SDAM P = % dam ping used in m odal com bination m ethod. (0.0 # SDAMP # 20.0) F
(Not required for SRSS m odal com binations)
SW HITE = Duration of Strong Shaking (seconds) (only used for DSC com binations) F

Notes: The Acceleration Response Spectra are supplied in the units of Acceleration of Gravity (g). The
response spectra are then m ultiplied by the gravitational constant GRAV supplied in line 5 of the
data set.
The spectra are supplied in the following section with one line required for each natural period of
free-vibration. The first line must be for the zero natural period of free-vibration. The total num ber
of lines is NSTEP.
In the response spectra calculations if the natural period of a m ode is greater than the value of the
NSTEPth natural period then the spectral acceleration for that period is assum ed to apply for all
greater natural periods.
If the m odal response output for each m ode is required then the counter KPRNT on data line 5
m ust be greater than zero

209
The rest of the input for the response spectra (sections 35c and 35d) is in the Response Spectra File the
nam e of which is specified by the user in the first excitation file nam e prom pt at the beginning of the
program execution. The default response is that the spectra is appended to the data file following lines
35a and 35b above.

40c. Response Spectra file flag

One input line with the word STAR, START or DATA: (the colon is m andatory) starting in colum n 1 and
the word must be in upper case. This line m ay be preceded by as m any header lines as desired.

START

40d. Response Spectra Input

The rem ainder of the input is the Response Spectra.. The record is in the form of a series of lines each
of which contains the natural period of free-vibration and the necessary spectral values. Each of these
values is read under the FORTRAN Free Form at so that the num bers are separated by one or m ore
blanks or a com m a. All NSTEP lines MUST be supplied. The num ber of spectral accelerations required
on each line depends on the values of IPVERT in line 2 of the data set and on the value of ISAM E in line
27b above. If IPVERT = 0 or 1, or ISAM E = 0 then there m ust be only one spectral acceleration on each
line. If IPVERT > 1 and ISAM E = 1 then there m ust be IPVERT spectral accelerations on each line. Use
as m any lines as are necessary to span all NSTEP points.

T(I) SA(i,1) SA(i,2) SA(i,3)

T(i) The ith natural period of free-vibration. *


SA(i,1) The ith spectral acceleration for the first earthquake com ponent. *
SA(i,2) The ith spectral acceleration for the second earthquake com ponent (if required). *
SA(i,3) The ith spectral acceleration for the third earthquake com ponent (if required). *

End

210
This page is intentionally left blank.

211

You might also like